JP2018094423A - Rotary drum type game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a rotary drum type game machine improving a control method in an AT machine so as to create new game properties, operability, and the like.SOLUTION: A rotary drum type game machine has: a main information display part capable of displaying information; and a sub information display part capable of displaying information. In a game where a prescribed winning combination is won, when a stop switch is operated in a first operation mode, a symbol combination to which first profit is imparted can be displayed, while when the stop switch is operated in a second operation mode, a symbol combination to which a second profit is imparted can be displayed. In the case that operation mode notification control is executed in a game where the prescribed winning combination is won, information by which it is possible to grasp that correct operation is not performed at the time when the stop switch is operated in an operation mode different from the first operation mode is displayed; even after a symbol combination imparting the second profit is displayed, prescribed winning notification information is not displayed to the sub information display part.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 46

Description

  The present invention relates to a spinning machine.

  In a spinning machine (slot machine), one game is started when a game start instruction device (start lever) is operated after inserting a predetermined number of game medals, and a plurality of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery. As a result of the rotation of the plurality of rows of reels (reel), the reels are stopped using the rotary stop device (stop button) for stopping the rotation, and the predetermined pattern on the effective line When a combination of (for example, a winning combination such as “777”) is lined up, a special gaming state in which a profit state is higher for the player than in the normal gaming state (a gaming state in which the lottery probability of a small role or the like is higher than in a normal state) ) Is a common type. Here, in a spinning-reel type gaming machine, when an image for production to enhance the fun of the game is displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal in a form synchronized with the rotating and stopping operations of the reel There is a structure to predict and enjoy the outcome of the game while comparing the design displayed on the spinning cylinder with the effect image displayed on the display. There are many things.

  In addition, in a recent spinning-type game machine, it is configured such that the presence / absence of a winning combination and the type of winning combination change depending on the operation mode (operation order and operation timing) of the spinning stop device, so that the player Many devices (so-called AT machines) that assist by issuing an operation instruction (navigation) to win an advantageous winning combination have also appeared. This AT machine has a state in which an operation instruction is issued (AT state) and a state in which an operation instruction is not issued (non-AT state). The longer the AT state, the more advantageous to the player. It has a great playability.

JP2002-346037

  However, there is a problem that further improvement of the control method in the AT machine is desired in order to create new gameability and operability.

The spinning machine according to this aspect is
Multiple reels,
Multiple stop switches,
A main information display section capable of displaying information;
A sub-information display unit capable of displaying information;
Main control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Sub-control means for controlling the production,
The main control means is
Role lottery means for performing role lottery,
Main information display control means for controlling the display of the main information display unit,
Under the situation where the notification state is controlled, at least in a game where a predetermined role is won, the main information display unit can be configured to display information capable of specifying the operation mode of the stop switch.
In the game where the predetermined combination is won, when the stop switch is operated in the first operation mode, the symbol combination to which the first profit is given can be displayed,
In the game in which the predetermined role is won, when the stop switch is operated in the second operation mode, the symbol combination to which the second profit is given can be displayed.
The sub-control means
In the game in which the predetermined role is won, it is possible to execute operation mode notification control for displaying information that can be specified to operate the stop switch in the first operation mode on the sub information display unit,
In the case where the operation mode notification control is executed in the game in which the predetermined role has been won, when the stop switch is operated in the first operation mode, information that enables grasping that the correct operation has been performed is displayed. After displaying the symbol combination to which the first profit is given, while displaying predetermined winning notification information on the sub information display unit,
In the case where the operation mode notification control is executed in the game in which the predetermined role is won, the correct operation is not performed when the stop switch is operated in an operation mode different from the first operation mode. Information that can be grasped is displayed, and the predetermined winning notification information is not displayed on the sub information display unit even after the symbol combination to which the second profit is given is displayed. This is a spinning machine.
<Appendix>
In addition, although the different aspect different from this aspect is listed below, it can implement without being limited to these at all.
The spinning machine according to this aspect is
A plurality of reels (eg, reel M50);
A plurality of stop switches (eg, stop button D40);
A main information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, push order display device D270);
A sub information display unit (for example, an effect display device S40) capable of displaying information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub game part (for example, sub control board S) connected to the main game part (for example, main control board M),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Role lottery means for performing role lottery,
Main information display control means for controlling the display of the main information display unit (for example, push order display device D270),
By satisfying the predetermined condition, it can be controlled to the notification state,
Information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination in a game in which the predetermined combination is won by at least the combination lottery means in the situation controlled to the notification state. It is configured to be able to display on an information display unit (for example, push order display device D270),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Sub information display control means for controlling the display of the sub information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40),
An operation mode in which, in a game in which the predetermined role is won, information that can specify an operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined role is displayed on the sub information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40). Notification control can be executed,
When performing the operation mode notification control, information that can specify an operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined role in the first display mode is displayed; And displaying information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined role in a second display mode that is different from the display mode. ,
When displaying information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination in the first display mode, the displayed stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) When the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) is operated in an operation mode different from the operation mode, the spinning machine is configured to hide the displayed information. .

  According to the rotary type gaming machine according to the present aspect, there is an effect that the control method in the AT machine can be improved.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a rotating type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a state in which the door of the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment is opened. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the inside of the medal slot in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front view and a top view of the medal payout device in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications in the swivel game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements in the reel type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a symbol combination list 1 in the rotary type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a symbol combination list 2 in the rotary type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 shows a list 3 of symbol combinations in the rotary type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a list of condition devices in the swivel type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a list of a small combination, a re-playing combination, and a bonus appearance rate in the rotary type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the rotating type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the setting change device control process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the non-recoverable error processing on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the internal lottery execution process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of an AT state transition control process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution processing on the main control board side in the spinning-reel game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of a reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process on the main control board side in the spinning-reel game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is an RT state transition diagram in the rotary type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the in-AT state start control process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is an AT state transition diagram in the rotating type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the timer interruption process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the power-off process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a push order display image diagram in the rotary type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the sub-side program start process on the sub-control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the sub main loop process on the sub control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is a flowchart of sub-side power-off processing on the sub-control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of one command processing on the sub-control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the process at the time of operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the rotating game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of processing during AT at the time of start lever operation on the sub-control board side in the rotating game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the special indication process at the time of start lever operation on the sub-control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the specialization process when the start lever is operated on the side of the sub-control board in the swivel type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of an internal BB advantageous process at the time of operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the rotating game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of a process at the time of first cylinder stop acceptance on the sub-control board side in the rotary game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the process at the time of accepting the second torso stop on the sub-control board side in the torso type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the third cylinder stop acceptance process on the sub-control board side in the rotary gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45 is an effect execution image diagram 1 during AT in the swivel type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is an effect execution image diagram 2 during an AT in the spinning-reel game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is an AT effect execution image diagram 3 in the spinning cylinder gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is an effect execution image diagram 4 during AT in the swivel type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a winning information generation table in the rotary type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is an effect group number determination table 1 in the rotary type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is an effect group number determination table 1 in the rotary type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is the production group number determination table 3 in the spinning cylinder gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is an example of the configuration of the lottery table in the spinning-reel game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of an AT state transition control process on the main control board side in the spinning-reel game machine according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the remaining number-of-games management process on the main control board side in the rotary gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the process at the time of operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the rotating game machine according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of the 1st trunk stop reception on the sub control board side in a gaming machine. FIG. 57 is an AT execution effect image diagram 5 in the spinning cylinder gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 58 is an AT execution effect execution image diagram 6 in the spinning machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 59 is an image of the occurrence of a door opening error in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present example. FIG. 60 is an example of the advantageous section indicator lighting timing in the rotary type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 61 is an example of a game state transition diagram in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present example.

  First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be described. “Random number” is a random number used in a lottery (lottery by an electronic computer) to determine some game content in a spinning-type game machine, and includes a pseudo-random number in addition to a random number in a narrow sense (for example, as a random number) Is a hard random number, a built-in random number generated by a main control chip including a CPU, or a soft random number as a pseudo-random number). For example, a so-called “basic random number” that affects the outcome of the game, specifically, a “winning random number” related to a special role or a winning combination (small role, replaying role) for shifting to a special game, etc. Can be mentioned. “CPU” is synonymous with what is well known in the art, and is not limited to the architecture (CISC, RISC, number of bits, etc.) used, processing performance, or the like. “Power interruption (power interruption)” means that the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine falls below a certain level regardless of whether the power switch provided on the gaming machine is operated or not. This also includes shutting down the power supply due to unforeseen circumstances such as unit damage or power outages. “ROM” is synonymous with what is well known in the art, and physically retains information (for example, “1” for a device configuration that conducts when a current for reading data is applied, It will be “0” if the device configuration is not.) RAM is synonymous with what is well known in the art, and electrically holds information (for example, when a current for reading data is applied, “1” is stored if it is stored, and it is not stored. It is generally “0.” In general, backup power is supplied to some or all of the data stored in the RAM when the power is interrupted). The “game state” is, for example, a special game state in which a game medal can be easily acquired and advantageous to the player (so-called jackpot game, such as a bonus game, a type 1 BB, a type 2 BB, or the like) ), The re-game probability variation game state (RT state) in which the re-game player win rate is higher (or lower) than the normal game state in which the re-game player win rate is a predetermined value, and the winning role Order of the reels for winning a prize, an AT (assist time) state in which the stop position can be notified, an ART (assist replay time) state in which the RT state and the AT state are combined, and the like. Also in the normal gaming state, the lottery probability of transition to the RT state, AT state, ART state is different, high probability normal gaming state, low probability normal gaming state, etc. (in this example, referred to as lottery state) ). Also, there is no problem even if the game states are combined {in addition, these game states and functions (for example, a lottery transition to the AT state, output of a notification instruction related to the reel stop order, etc.) control the game progress. There is no problem even if all are mounted on the main control board side}. In this example, the state related to the AT and the RT state are individually described. The RT state is referred to as “RT1” and the state related to the AT is referred to as “normal game state”. As a state relating to ART, the state relating to ART may be referred to as “normal gaming state” or the like. “Winning combination” is the type of condition device (or condition device number) won by internal lottery. The “notification state” is a state related to an AT capable of executing push order navigation described later, and even if a game is won by a condition device that does not execute push order navigation because the winning combination is not different depending on the reel stop order. If the state related to the AT is a state in which the push order navigation can be performed, the “notification state” is set. The “counter value” is also referred to as “notification game executable number”, and is the AT remaining game number or the counter value of the AT counter M60, which will be described later. For example, when “the number of notification games that can be executed” is 1 or more (the game that has become “0” may be included), the push order navigation described later can be executed. In addition, as the “notification game executable number”, the number of game media obtained based on the winning of the small role (mainly the push order bell role) (the number obtained by subtracting the inserted number from the paid-out number) The number of wins for the order bell may be adopted. In addition, the “special notification state” is a state that is most advantageous to the player among the states related to the AT, and is referred to as “addition special state” in this example. The “specific condition” is a condition under which the AT counter value can be subtracted. For example, the specific condition is that, for example, one game is completed, a predetermined combination (for example, push order bell combination) is won. “Type 1 special character” is a character that increases the number of symbol combinations related to winnings per prescribed number or increases the probability that the conditional device related to winnings per prescribed number will operate. The operation can be continued until a game result is obtained that does not exceed 12 times, and is sometimes referred to as RB (regular bonus). "Type 1 special combination continuous operation device" is a device that can operate the first type special combination continuously, and is activated when a specific combination of symbols is displayed. The operation is terminated and may be referred to as a BB (Big Bonus) or a first type BB. “Type 2 special combination” is a combination that activates the condition device related to winning regardless of the result of the combination lottery. The combination is activated when a predetermined game result is obtained. In such a case, the operation is terminated and may be referred to as CB (challenge bonus). "Type 2 special feature continuous operation device" is a device that can continuously operate type 2 special features, and is activated when a combination of specific symbols is displayed. The operation ends and is sometimes referred to as MB (middle bonus) or second type BB. The “ordinary accessory” is an accessory that increases the number of symbol combinations related to winning for each specified number or increases the probability that the condition device related to winning for each specified number will operate. It operates when a combination is displayed and ends when the result of one game is obtained, and is sometimes referred to as SB (single bonus). The “all JACIN type” is a configuration in which, when the first type BB combination wins, it is regarded as having been JACIN and is always in the RB during the execution of the first type BB. The “JACIN lottery type” is a configuration that repeatedly executes non-RB and RB during execution of the first type BB. In addition, the “non-control reel” is a reel in which the pull-in control that can be executed after performing the stop operation is not executed, and is stopped at the nearest reel position where the stop operation can be stopped from the reel position where the stop operation is accepted. It is a reel. The “all CB type” is a configuration that is always in the CB when the second type BB is executed. The “CB transfer lottery type” is a configuration that repeatedly executes non-CB and CB during execution of the second type BB.

  Note that this embodiment is merely an example, the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of flag on / off, the name of the means responsible for each step, etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. In addition, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be understood as being limited to being applied to specific items, and may be in any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification example of an embodiment is a modification example of another embodiment, and even if one modification example and another modification example are described independently, there is the modification example. It should be understood that a combination of the modified example and another modified example is also described.

(This embodiment)
Here, before describing each component, the feature (outline) of the spinning-rotor type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, with reference to FIG. 1 (FIG. 2 for a part of the configuration), a basic structure on the front side of the rotary type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. The rotating type gaming machine P mainly includes a front door (also referred to as a front door), a back box (also referred to as a cabinet and a base body), a reel unit installed in the back box, a hopper device, a power supply unit E, a main control. A substrate M (a substrate on which the main control chip C including the CPUMC is mounted) and a sub control substrate S (a substrate on which the sub control chip SC including the CPUSC is mounted) are configured. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

<Front door DU>
The front door DU includes a mechanism for enabling visual recognition of a gaming state, a mechanism for enabling input of game media, a mechanism for operating a reel unit, and other mechanisms. Specifically, the reel window D160, the insertion number display lamp D210, the operation state display lamp D180, the special game state display apparatus D250, the credit number display apparatus D200, and the payout number display apparatus are provided as mechanisms for making the gaming state visible. A (push order display device) D270 (sometimes referred to as a push order display device D270), an AT counter value display device D280, an advantageous section indicator YH, and the like are attached. Further, as a mechanism for enabling the insertion of game media and inputting the number of bets (the number of bets), a medal insertion slot D170, a bet button D220, and a mechanism for enabling the payout of the inserted game media are settled. Button D60 is attached. As a mechanism for operating the reel, a start lever D50 and a stop button D40 are attached. In addition, the swivel type gaming machine in the present embodiment protrudes to the player side to which the start lever D50, the stop button D40, the medal slot D170, the bet button D220, the settlement button D60, the sub input button SB and the like are attached. It has a shape console. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail.

<Mechanism to make game state visible>
Next, the main part of the mechanism for making the gaming state visible is described. The reel window D160 is a transparent member formed of a synthetic resin or the like that constitutes a part of the front door DU, and is configured such that the reel unit installed in the gaming machine frame can be seen through the reel window D160. In addition, the insertion number indicator lamp D210 is constituted by an LED, and is configured so that the same number of LEDs as the number of medals currently bet (to insert a game medal necessary for starting one game) are lit. Has been. Further, the operation state indicator lamp D180 is configured by an LED and is configured to be turned on / off according to the current operation state (medal acceptance / non-acceptance state, re-game stop state, game start wait state, etc.). The special game state display device D250 is configured by a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of payouts paid out during the special game. The special game state display device D250 may not be provided, and in such a case, the total number of payouts in the effect display device S40 (also referred to as a second information display unit) to be described later. By displaying so that the player can recognize the total number of payouts paid out during the special game, a user-friendly gaming machine can be obtained. The credit amount display device D200 is configured by a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of medals (credit number) stored in the gaming machine as medals held by the player. The payout amount display device (push order display device) D270 is configured by a 7-segment display, and the number of game medals currently paid out and the reel stop order (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button) The condition device (the so-called push order (sometimes referred to as a role with a push order), which may differ depending on the winning combination depending on the stop order of D43). Is a reel that is most advantageous to the player in a game in which a profit rate (the number of payouts, the subsequent RT state, etc., which can be different) is generally established. The stop order can be notified (the notification may be referred to as push order navigation). Thus, the payout amount display device (push order display device) D270 is configured to be able to execute two displays of the number of game medals currently being paid out and the reel stop order that provides the highest profit to the player. The display mode is such that the player does not misunderstand which of the two displays is being executed, and the details of the display mode will be described later. Further, the AT counter value display device D280 plays games according to the push order navigation display displayed on the push order display device D270 (also referred to as a first information display unit) among the states related to AT (details will be described later). It is possible to display the number of games that can stay in a state relating to AT that is advantageous for the player to be guaranteed when progressing (in this example, it is also referred to as a push order navigation state or a notification game and will be described in detail later). It is configured as follows. Note that the AT counter value display device D280 may not be provided. In such a configuration, the player can be configured to display the number of games that can stay in the AT state on the effect display device S40. Can recognize the number of games in which the state related to the advantageous AT is guaranteed and can be a user-friendly gaming machine. The payout number display device (push order display device) D270 may be configured to be divided into two devices: a payout number display device and a push order display device.

  Further, the advantageous section indicator YH is constituted by an LED, and is configured to turn on when it is an “advantageous section” and to be turned off when it is not an “advantageous section” (for lighting and extinguishing timings). Will be described later). Here, in the case of the spinning type gaming machine according to the present example, a special gaming state (so-called big hit game, which is a bonus game, in which a game medal can be easily obtained and which is advantageous to the player, like the conventional spinning type gaming machine. Or the first type BB, the second type BB, etc.), and the winning rate of the re-gamer is higher (or lower) than the normal gaming state where the winning rate of the re-gamer is a predetermined value. The re-play probability variation game state (RT state), the reel stop order for winning the winning combination, the AT (assist time) state in which the stop position can be notified, the RT state and the AT state Combined ART (assist replay time) state, etc. can be taken, but apart from these “gaming state”, one of three “game sections” of “normal section”, “standby section” and “advantage section” Can be set Going on. In this example, the “standby section” is not set, and any one of the “normal section” and the “advantage section” is set. Among these, the “advantageous section” is positioned as being relatively advantageous to the player over the other “game sections”. For example, the “gaming state” is an AT state or an ART state. “Advantageous section” is associated. That is, when the “gaming state” is in the AT state or ART state, the advantageous section indicator YH is lit, but as will be described later, the setting control for the “game section” is also the setting control for the “gaming state”. Similarly, since it is performed on the main control board side that controls the progress of the game, whether or not the game progress status is relatively advantageous for the player by the lighting / extinction status of the advantageous section indicator YH, It can be communicated to players without lies. As will be described later, if the “advantageous section” continues until a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) is reached, the “normal section” is forcibly set. Since the state related to the AT is also forcibly terminated (information for maintaining the AT state is cleared and initialized), the change of the set “game section” also affects the transition of the “game state” As a result, it is possible to automatically suppress a significant increase in gambling due to a “game state” such as an AT state or an ART state with a relatively high degree of design freedom. It is. As described above, when the “advantageous section” continues until the predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) is reached, the “normal section” is forcibly set, that is, the “advantageous section” ends. However, the termination condition of the “advantageous section” is not limited to this. The end condition of the “advantageous section” in the spinning-reel game machine according to this example is “the push that can acquire the small combination with the largest number of payouts among the small combinations that make up the push combination (the combination with push order)” One execution of sequential navigation (for example, when there are seven, three, and one small combination as the small combination constituting the push forward combination, the push navigation in which the largest number of payouts can be acquired is seven. If there is a push order that can be acquired 7 or 1 by the push order, and a push order that can be obtained 3 by the push order, the push order navigation that can be obtained by 3 is referred to here. Does not apply to push order navigation) or “Wins any of BB, RB, MB” and satisfies “arbitrary end condition (40G1 set loop lottery not selected (AT), fixed 32G Elapsed (gaseous signs, etc.)) or “Advantageous zone 1500G” is the end condition To have. In the case of a specification in which there is no push order bell combination (eg, a specification in which there is a replay push order for transitioning to the RT state, but there is no small combination in which the number of payouts varies depending on the push order) The condition for ending the advantageous section of “one push order navigation that can acquire the small combination with the largest number of payouts” is excluded. Further, in the present embodiment, since the small combination constituting the push combination is composed of the small combination corresponding to the 11-sheet combination and the small combination corresponding to the 1-sheet combination, “the number of payouts is the largest. The “execution of one push order navigation capable of acquiring a small combination” refers to notifying the push order in which eleven medals can be acquired (11 winning combinations can be won).

<Mechanism to enable input of game media>
Next, the main part of the mechanism for enabling input of game media will be described. The medal slot D170 is a slot for game medals, and the game medal inserted into the slot is guided to the inside of the gaming machine in a situation where medals can be received. Also, an insertion acceptance sensor D10s, a first insertion sensor D20s, and a second insertion sensor D30s are provided in the gaming machine as sensors for detecting the insertion of medals, and are guided into the gaming machine. When it is determined that a game medal has been inserted normally, the inserted medal can be detected as a bet. The bet button D220 is configured to be operable by the player, and is configured to bet a stored medal (credit medal) by the operation. Further, the settlement button D60 is configured to be operable by the player, and the stored medal (credit medal) and / or bet medal can be paid back to the player by the operation. Yes. Note that the game medals paid out by operating the settlement button D60 are configured to be paid out to the discharge port D240.

<Mechanism for operating reel unit>
Next, the start lever D50 is configured to be operable by the player, and is configured to be able to start the reel operation by the operation. The stop button D40 is provided with a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, and a right stop button D43 that can be operated by the player. Has been.

<Other mechanisms provided on the front door DU>
Next, the main part of the other mechanism provided in the front door DU will be described with reference to a perspective view showing the internal configuration of the rotating game machine P by opening the front door DU of FIG. The front door DU has an effect display device S40 for displaying effects such as a notice effect and a background effect as a mechanism for enhancing the fun of the game, and a game effect lamp D26 that can be turned on in various lighting modes. Middle panel D (medium decoration panel) which is a member formed by a signal relay door substrate D, a medal selector DS for detecting inserted medals, a speaker S20 capable of outputting sound, a synthetic resin, and the like. ), An upper panel D130, a lower panel D140, and the like. The effect display device S40 is attached to the upper part on the back side of the front door DU so that a display unit that displays the effect or the like can be visually recognized through a perspective region formed on the upper panel. In addition, the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 have a light emission source that emits light according to the progress of the game of the rotating game machine P. A unit D150 is provided, and LED lamp units S10 are provided on each of the right side and the left side across the upper panel D130. In addition, a door substrate D is attached below the reel window D160 on the back surface of the front door DU. Input signals from the stop button D40, the start lever D50, the checkout button D60, etc. described above are attached to the door substrate D. Is input, and has a function of a relay board that directly or processes the input signal and outputs it to a main control board M described later. Further, a medal selector DS, which will be described in detail later, is provided in the vicinity of the door substrate D on the back surface of the front door DU, corresponding to the medal insertion slot D170, and the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 is detected and simplified. It has a function of performing authenticity, guiding an appropriate medal to a hopper H40 described later, and returning an inappropriate medal to a medal tray D230 described later. Further, one speaker S20 is provided on each of the left and right sides below the door substrate D. The middle panel is the upper part of the console, the lower part of the upper panel D130, and the panel part including the reel window described above. Further, the sub input button SB attached to the console D190 described above is a member used for button striking effects and the like, and a mini game (for example, “AT state”) by the player's operation of the sub input button SB. It is a member configured to be able to execute progress such as the success or failure of rushing into. The front door DU of the swivel type gaming machine P can detect the open / close state of the medal tray D230 and the front door DU that receive a game medal (or may be simply referred to as a medal) discharged from the discharge port D240. A door switch D80 is provided. Further, the front door DU is provided with a key hole D260, and a key (door key) that matches the shape of the key hole D260 is inserted into the key hole D260 {in addition, twisted in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise)} The front door DU can be opened. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the door key is inserted into the keyhole D260 {and in addition, twisted in a predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise)}, so that an error state (door opening error or the like) can be canceled. Yes.

  Next, a back box (also referred to as a cabinet or a base) and each device installed in the back box will be described. A reel unit is attached to substantially the center of the back box so that a part of the back box can be visually recognized through the reel window D160. The reel unit includes a reel M50 and a drive source (stepping motor or the like) for the reel M50. The reel M50 includes a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53. Here, each reel part is formed of a synthetic resin or the like, and a plurality of symbols are drawn on the outer periphery of the reel part (on the reel band). And based on operation of each stop button in the start lever D50 and the stop button D40, it is comprised so that rotation operation and stop operation | movement of each reel part are enabled. Although not shown, an LED (hereinafter also referred to as a reel backlight) is provided inside the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and when the LED is lit, the outer periphery of the reel portion is provided. It is configured so that it can be visually recognized as if the outer periphery of the reel portion is lit by the light transmitted through. In addition, above the reel M50, a winding substrate K, which will be described later, for driving each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) is stored.

  Further, a main control board M, which will be described later, which controls the entire game is stored above the reel M50, and on the left side of the reel M50 is an effect display device S40, an LED lamp unit S10, and a speaker S20 shown in FIG. A sub-control board S, which will be described later, that controls various effects performed using the above-described information is stored. The main control board M has a setting key switch M20 used for executing a setting change device control process (to change settings), which will be described later, and a setting / reset capable of executing a setting value change, error cancellation, and the like. Button M30 is connected. In FIG. 2, the setting key switch M20 and the setting / reset button M30 are not shown, but they may be provided at appropriate positions on the main control board M (that is, the front door DU is opened). Otherwise, it may be in a location where it is difficult to access artificially).

  Below the reel M50, there are provided a hopper H40 for collecting inserted game medals and a medal payout device H for paying out game medals, and a power supply board for supplying power to the entire revolving game machine P E is stored. The game medals paid out from the medal payout device H pass through the coin shooter D90 and are paid out from the discharge port D240. In addition, a power switch E10 for turning on the power of the rotating game machine P is also provided on the front surface of the power supply board E (also referred to as a power supply unit E). Details of the medal payout device H will be described later.

<Medal selector DS>
Next, the medal selector DS will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a path (selector) of game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 inside the spinning cylinder type gaming machine P. The medal selector DS is provided with an insertion acceptance sensor D10s serving as a passage for game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 in the vicinity of the door substrate D, and below the insertion reception sensor D10s, a game medal is discharged to the discharge opening D240. For example, a coin shooter D90 is provided. The insertion acceptance sensor D10s has a function of selecting game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 mainly based on dimensions, and accepting only game medals that conform to the standard dimensions. The selected medal (or other foreign matter) is returned to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100. If the player inserts a game medal before operating the start lever D50 (in a state where the insertion of the game medal is valid), the game medal is selected by the insertion acceptance sensor D10s, and only those satisfying the standard are selected. A medal that does not satisfy the standard and is inserted into the hopper H40 is returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. On the other hand, when a game medal is inserted after the start lever D50 is operated (in a state where the insertion of the game medal is not valid), regardless of whether the standard is satisfied, the inserted game medal Is returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. In addition, a sensor relating to medal insertion, which will be described in detail later, is provided inside the insertion acceptance sensor D10s (the back of the flow path). The signal is detected by the second input sensor D30s and the signal is supplied to the main control board M to be described later.

  Next, a sensor related to medal insertion will be described in detail. A game medal inserted into the medal slot D170 first passes through the slot acceptance sensor D10s. The insertion acceptance sensor D10s is a mechanical double sensor, and when the game medal passes, it turns on when the two protruding mechanisms are pressed, and the game medal can normally pass through the passage. . Also, with this configuration, when a foreign object that is not a game medal (a foreign object that does not satisfy the standard, for example, a diameter smaller than the game medal) is inserted, the two protruding mechanisms are pressed down. Not. Such medals cannot be maintained in the standing state, and thus cannot pass through the passage (the medals fall down), and are paid back to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90 as described above. In addition, the insertion acceptance sensor D10s is configured to be able to determine that there is an error even when the on-time continues for a predetermined time or longer (as a result, the blocker D100 can be turned off). .

  When the game medal normally passes through the blocker D100, it passes through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s immediately after passing. The throwing sensors (first throwing sensor D20s and second throwing sensor D30s) are composed of two sensors (adjacently arranged at an interval smaller than the standard diameter of the game medal), and each sensor is turned on. -Various errors can be detected by monitoring the off-state (the order of transition of the on / off combination of the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s, etc.) and the on / off time. It is configured.

<Medal payout device H>
Next, the medal payout device H will be described in detail with reference to a front view and a top view of the medal payout device H in FIG. The medal payout device H is operated with the checkout button in the state where credits (game medals stored electronically inside the gaming machine) or bets (medals inserted to start the game) exist. It is activated when a game medal is paid out by winning or winning. In operation, first, the hopper motor H80 is driven to rotate the disk H50 about the disk rotation axis H50a. Due to the rotation, the game medals in the medal payout device H are displaced from the game medal outlet H60 toward the discharge port D240 by displacing the discharge urging means H70. The payout sensors (the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s) are composed of two sensors, and the ON / OFF status of each sensor (the ON / OFF state of the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s). By monitoring the order of transition of the combination of off, etc.) and the time of on / off, various errors can be detected. More specifically, for example, when the game medal outlet H60 normally passes, the first payout sensor H10s = off and the second payout sensor H20s = off due to the displacement of the discharge biasing means H70. 1 payout sensor H10s = off / second payout sensor H20s = off → first payout sensor H10s = on / second payout sensor H20s = off → first payout sensor H10s = on / second payout sensor H20s = on → first payout Sensor H10s = off / second payout sensor H20s = on → first payout sensor H10s = off / second payout sensor H20s = off, so that when a movement contrary to this sensor state transition is detected It is possible to exemplify the configuration of an error.

  Next, FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of the swivel type gaming machine in the present embodiment. The spinning-reel type gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a prescribed number (the maximum number of game medals that can be bet in one game) of 3, and the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 are all 20 frames. The effective line for which a winning determination is made is one line of “upper left reel M51, middle middle M52, lower right M53”. The maximum payout number is 11 and the minimum payout number is 1 (correspondence between the winning combination and the payout number will be described later). In addition, the order of priority winning (in order of drawing-in priority) is “re-playing role → small role (bell, watermelon, etc.) → bonus”. For example, when the re-playing role and bonus are established at the same time The symbol combination which becomes the re-game player is stopped and displayed, and the bonus cannot be won. Also, when the bell and watermelon are established, if a stop button is pressed at a position where both can be retracted (positions within 4 frames to the winning stop position), priority is given to a small part with a large number of payouts. It is configured to retract. The configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and the number of frames of each reel is changed (for example, changed to 21 frames), or the configuration of the effective line is changed (for example, 5 lines of 3 horizontal lines and 2 diagonal lines). There is no problem even if it is changed to a line and changed to one line of the lower stage of the left reel M51, the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and the upper stage of the right reel M53). In addition, as a pull-in control when a push order small role that gives different profits to the player depending on the push order is won, a small role with a large number of payouts is operated when operated in a predetermined correct push order. Is given priority (number priority control), and can be displayed in a stop position (within 4 frames from the stop operation) when operated in an incorrect answer push order different from the correct answer push order. Among the symbols arranged), control (number priority control) is performed to increase the possibility of winning (the number of winning combinations among the plurality of winning symbol combinations is the highest).

  Next, FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements of the swivel type gaming machine in the present embodiment. As shown in the figure, the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53 are all 20 frames (0 to 19), and the symbols are “Black Seven”, “White Seven”, “ There are 10 types: “Sheep”, “Blank”, “Bell”, “Replay A”, “Replay B”, “Watermelon A”, “Watermelon B”, and “Cherry”. Here, “blank” is a symbol included in the symbol combination that constitutes the winning combination like other symbols, and does not mean a symbol that does not constitute the winning combination, but a symbol that constitutes the winning combination including “blank” As a combination, for example, “watermelon B / replay A / blank” is replay 02. The configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the type of design is increased / decreased / changed.

  Next, FIGS. 7 to 9 are symbol combination lists 1 to 3 in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, there are a plurality of symbol combinations for each condition device. As will be described later, depending on the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, This one symbol combination is configured to be stopped and displayed on the effective line (one line described above). In addition, even if the same type of symbols is not available on the active line, the same symbols are easily arranged in a line on the lines other than the active line when viewed from the player. It is configured so that three watermelon symbols are aligned on one line on the reel, such as aligned on a horizontal line). Further, in the present embodiment, a combination of symbols that will be a first type BB combination (a so-called first type special combination, which is hereinafter referred to simply as a BB combination), 1 type BB-A (continuous operation of RB-A and finished with payout exceeding 264 sheets) and 1 type BB-B (continuous operation of RB-B, 132 sheets) “Black Seven / Black Seven / Black Seven” and “Type 7 BB-C (continuous operation of RB-B, finished with more than 132 payouts)” It has three symbol combinations with “White Seven”. In the present embodiment, when the first type BB combination wins and the BB is executed (the combination is activated), one BB is executed in all the games in the BB during the execution of the BB. Refers to the lottery table, and is configured to draw a winning combination (small role, replaying combination) other than the winning combination (a method that does not switch the table referred to in the case of lottery during one BB execution) Hereinafter, it may be referred to as an all-JACIN type). Note that the format of the first type BB combination is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that the table referred to in the combination lottery can be switched during the execution of one BB. Further, when the RT state is “RT1”, when the symbol combination corresponding to No. 14 to No. 16 corresponding to the replay 04 is stopped and displayed, it is configured to shift to RT0 (for details of the RT state) Will be described later). Note that “RT0” is more disadvantageous to the player than “RT1”, and thus transition from “RT1” to “RT0” may be referred to as falling. In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to No. 17 which is replay 05 is stopped and displayed, “Black Seven” can be stopped and displayed at the lower stage of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. When the symbol combination corresponding to the corresponding replay 05 is stopped and displayed, “white seven” can be stopped and displayed on the lower stage of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 (details will be described later). ). In addition, when the push order bell, which is a condition device of “winning-A1” to “winning-A6”, which will be described later, is won, the reels are stopped in the order of pushing most advantageous to the player, and the 21st to 27th When the combination of symbols “Wind 01” to “Win 03” corresponding to is stopped and 11 game medals are paid out, the reels are stopped in a pressing order different from the pressing order most advantageous to the player. Symbol combinations corresponding to “No. 08” to “No. 11” corresponding to Nos. 39 to 56 are stopped and displayed, and one game medal is paid out. In the figure, “-” indicates that any symbol may be stopped and displayed. For example, “bell-bell” corresponding to No. 23 is an effective line of the left reel M51 and the right reel M53. If the bell is stopped and displayed, 11 game medals can be obtained regardless of which symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line of the middle reel M52.

  Next, FIG. 10 is a list of condition devices in the present embodiment. In the figure, the conditional device number is referred to as a winning number, and the conditional device number may also be referred to as a winning number thereafter. In this embodiment, the re-playing role is provided from re-playing-A to re-playing-D3 (winning numbers 1 to 6), and in the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. Correspondingly, the replaying combination to be stopped and displayed can be different. Here, in the present embodiment, as illustrated in the item of “conditional device” which is the rightmost column, there are a plurality of numbers according to the stop order and stop positions of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. The condition devices of the type can be stopped and displayed, and among the plurality of types of condition devices, the condition devices having the same winning number are gathered, and “condition device (name)” is the third column from the right. It is shown in the item of. Specifically, for example, in the “re-game-A” that is the condition device corresponding to the winning number 1, “re-game” is selected according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. Three kinds of condition devices “01”, “replay 02”, and “replay 03” can be stopped and displayed. The “condition device (name)” may be simply referred to as a condition device. In addition, a condition device relating to replay such as “replay 01” may be referred to as a re-playing role, and a condition device in which a game medal is paid out by winning a prize such as “winning 01” may be referred to as a small role. A conditional device that starts a BB when it is stopped and displayed such as “1 type BB-A” may be referred to as a BB role. In addition, when winning numbers 21 to 23 and 25 to 27 are won, the BB role and the small role will be won, and in such a case, the symbol corresponding to the selected small role will stop. When the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42 and the right stop button D43 are operated at a position where they can be displayed, the symbol corresponding to the small role is not displayed without stopping, and the symbol corresponding to the small role is stopped and displayed. When the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42 and right stop button D43 are operated at a position where the corresponding symbol does not stop display (cannot be retracted), the symbol corresponding to the small role does not stop and is displayed. Is configured to stop display. Specifically, for example, in the case where “1 type BB-B + winning-C” which is the condition device of the winning number 21 is won, the cherry that is “winning 12” or “winning 13” and “1 type BB” -B "can be stopped and displayed. More specifically, when the reels are stopped in the order of the left reel M51 → the middle reel M52 → the right reel M53, (1) symbol numbers 0 to 4 on the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop (FIG. 6). When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing at which the reel is positioned), the symbol number 4 corresponding to “winning 12” stops on the upper stage of the left reel M51, and the middle reel M52 Regardless of the stop position of the right reel M53, “winning 12” is stopped and displayed. (2) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 5 to 12 are positioned on the upper stage of the left reel M51 in the first stop, “winning 13” is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51. The symbol number 6, 11, or 16 corresponding to is stopped, and “winning 13” is stopped and displayed regardless of the stop positions of the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. (3-1) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing at which the symbol numbers 13 to 19 are positioned on the upper stage of the left reel M51 in the first stop, “1” is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51. The symbol number 17 or 19 corresponding to the seed BB-B stops. (3-2) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 14 to 18 are located in the middle stage of the middle reel M52 in the second stop, “1” is placed in the middle stage of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to the species BB-B is stopped, and then the right stop button D43 is operated at the operation timing when the symbol numbers 13 to 17 are located in the lower stage of the right reel M53 in the third stop. In this case, the symbol number 17 corresponding to “1 type BB-B” is stopped at the lower stage of the right reel M53, and the BB combination is stopped and displayed. (3-3) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 19 to 13 are located in the middle stage of the middle reel M52 in the second stop, “1” is placed in the middle stage of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to the “type BB-B” cannot be stopped, and neither of the condition devices is stopped and displayed.

  Next, the item “role” shows what role the “condition device (name)” is, and “normal replay” corresponding to the winning number 1 indicates the order of pressing the stop button. Regardless of the replaying role in which the re-gamer whose RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed, the “reverse pressed white 7 replay” corresponding to the winning number 2 is the RT button regardless of the pressing order of the stop button. This is a condition device related to replay in which a re-game player whose state does not change is stopped and displayed. However, the reverse reel (the reel is stopped in the order of right reel M53 → middle reel M52 → left reel M51) and the right reel M53 is stopped. Stops at the operation timing when the range of symbol numbers 18 to 2, the range of symbol numbers 9 to 13 of the middle reel M52, and the range of symbol numbers 5 to 10 of the left reel M51 are located at the lower stage of each reel. Operate the button And by, the right reel M53, "white Seven" is stopped and displayed in the lower part of the center reel M52 and left reel M51, white Seven has been configured to appear to be aligned in the lower part when viewed from the player. In addition, in the game that was won by Re-Game-B and won the AT extra lottery, the player was won the AT extra lottery by performing an effect (details will be described later) instructing to aim at “White Seven” by pressing it in reverse. It is comprised so that it can alert | report to a player. “Forward-pressed black 7-match replay” corresponding to the winning number 3 is a conditional device related to a replay in which a re-gamer whose RT state does not shift is stopped regardless of the press order of the stop button. The reels are stopped in the order of left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53), the range of symbol numbers 13 to 19 of the left reel M51, the range of symbol numbers 14 to 18 of the middle reel M52, the right reel By operating the stop button at the operation timing when the range of symbol numbers 13 to 17 of M53 is positioned at the lower stage of each reel, “Black Seven” is displayed at the lower stage of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. Is displayed in a stopped state, and when viewed from the player, the black sevens appear to be aligned at the bottom. In addition, in the game that won the Re-Game-C and won the AT extra lottery, the player won the AT extra lottery by performing an effect (details will be described later) instructing to aim for “Black Seven” by pushing forward. It is comprised so that it can alert | report to a player.

  In addition, “RT maintenance RP1 ** (3 choices)” corresponding to the winning number 4 is one of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 as the first stop reel (which stop button is operated). )), The re-game player whose stop display is different may be different, and when the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the re-game 01, the re-game 02 or the re-game 03 in which the RT state does not shift. Is stopped and the first stop reel is the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, the replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from “RT1” to “RT0” is stopped and displayed. In addition, “RT maintenance RP * 1 * (3 choices)” corresponding to the winning number 5 is one of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 as the first stop reel (which stop button is operated). If the first stop reel is the middle reel M52, the replay 03 in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed. When the stop reel is the left reel M51 or the right reel M53, the replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from “RT1” to “RT0” is stopped and displayed. In addition, “RT maintenance RP ** 1 (3 choices)” corresponding to the winning number 6 determines which of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 the first stop reel (operates which stop button is operated). If the first reel is the right reel M53, the replay 01 or the replay 03 in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed. If the first stop reel is the left reel M51 or the middle reel M52, the replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from “RT1” to “RT0” is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, “push order bell 123” to “push order bell 321” corresponding to the winning numbers 7 to 12 are condition devices in which the winning combination depending on which of the six reel stop orders is selected may be different. For example, “left reel M51: 1, middle reel M52: 2, right reel M53: 3”, and in the case of “123”, “left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53” is stopped in the pressing order. For example, in the case of “winning A-1” (winning number 7), “123” = “Left → Middle → Right” is stopped in order (correct answer in the push order), which is the maximum number obtained. The symbol combination of “winning 01” from which eleven game medals can be acquired is stopped and displayed. Note that “123” in the “push order bell 123” indicates the push order (reel stop order) in which the maximum number of sheets obtained for the winning number can be obtained. In addition, when the reels are stopped in the pressing order other than the pressing order in which the maximum number of acquired sheets can be acquired, that is, if the correct answer cannot be made in the pressing order, one sheet is paid out. Then, in the state related to AT such as “AT in progress state”, the push order of the re-game player and the push order of the bell are navigated (the push order that gives the highest profit is displayed on the push order display device D270), and “the normal game state It is possible to create a plurality of gaming states with different profit margins of the player not navigating the pushing order to the states relating to AT. The state related to AT will be described later.

  In addition, the “common bell” corresponding to the winning number 13 can acquire 11 game medals, which is the maximum number of winnings, even if any of winning prizes 04 to 07 stops, that is, the maximum profit is obtained regardless of the pushing order. It is a condition device that can be acquired, and is sometimes called a push order unquestioned bell. In addition, “Watermelon A” corresponding to the winning number 15 is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can be easily aligned on the parallel line. For example, the 60th prize in FIG. No. 14 has three watermelons A in the middle of each reel. In addition, “Watermelon B” corresponding to the winning number 16 is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can be easily arranged in an oblique line. For example, the 66th prize in FIG. In the case of No. 16, three watermelons are aligned obliquely downward, such as watermelon B on the upper stage of the left reel M51, watermelon B on the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and watermelon A on the lower stage of the right reel M53. In addition, “BB medium and weak rare role (diagonal bell alignment)” corresponding to the winning number 17 is a condition device that can align three bells on the active line, which will be described later, but won during BB. This is a condition device in which an AT addition lottery is executed. Also, “BB medium-rare small role (V-shaped bells)” corresponding to the winning number 18 is a conditional device that can stop and display the bell on the upper stage of the left reel M51, the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and the upper stage of the right reel M53. As will be described in detail later, this is a condition device in which an AT addition lottery is executed by winning during BB.

  Next, in the item of “bonus winning information”, a numerical value from 0 to 3 is assigned to each winning number. In the present embodiment, the winning number that does not include the bonus (BB role) has the bonus winning information set to 0, and the winning number that includes 1 type BB-A as the winning number that includes the bonus (BB role) (19) Bonus winning information of 1, winning type number (20-23) including 1 type BB-B is 2, winning winning information of winning number (24-27) including type 1, BB-C is 3 It is said. By storing the bonus winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information regarding which BB is established and which BB combination is won. Details of the bonus winning information will be described later.

  Next, in the item “winning / replay winning information”, numerical values from 0 to 18 are assigned to each winning number. In this embodiment, winning numbers that do not include re-playing roles and small roles (winning numbers 0 corresponding to loses and winning numbers 19, 20, 24 corresponding to bonuses) are set to 0 for winning / replaying winning information. The 1-18 winning / replay winning information is distributed for each condition device for the winning numbers including the replaying role or the small role. By storing the winning / replay winning information by the main control board M, it is possible to store information related to which replaying combination or small combination has been won. Details of the winning / replay winning information will be described later.

  Next, in the item “production group number”, numerical values from 0 to 11 are assigned for each winning number. By transmitting the production group number from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, the production executed by the sub control board S side can be determined. Details of the production group number will be described later.

  Next, in the item “departure group number”, a numerical value from 0 to 13 is assigned to each winning number. The main control board M stores the outgoing ball group number, and the stored outgoing ball group number is used when executing a lottery related to the AT (for example, AT lottery, AT additional lottery), and the lottery processing related to the AT is executed. Program and data capacity can be reduced. Note that even if a condition device with a payout group number of 0 is won, the AT lottery and the AT extra lottery are not executed. On the other hand, when a conditional device whose payout group number is not 0 is won, AT lottery or AT addition lottery can be executed. The details of the outgoing ball group number will be described later. In addition, even when a condition device with a payout group number of 0 is won, an AT lottery or AT lottery may be executed. In such a case, the payout group number is It is preferable that the lottery result is always lost (non-winning) when the condition device that becomes 0 is won and the AT lottery or the AT lottery is executed.

  Next, FIG. 11 shows a lottery probability in which a winning number (condition device number, also referred to as a winning combination) and bonus (also referred to as a winning combination BB) and a bonus (respectively referred to as a winning combination) are determined by the winning lottery means in the present embodiment. It is a list which shows (it is also called a win rate). In the figure, the winning rate of the winning number is shown.

  First, the lottery probability in “RT0”, “RT1”, and “RT2” when the BB is not operated will be described in detail. In this embodiment, the appearance rate (lottery probability) of the winning combination (especially the replaying combination) can be different depending on the RT state, and the “replaying combination” (the total appearance of all replaying combinations) In the case of “RT1”, the rate of occurrence is higher than the other RT states. In addition, “re-game 04” (a so-called falling re-game player, “RT1” and a bonus corresponding to the re-game player in a situation where a bonus is not won can be displayed with winning numbers 4-6. When the combination is displayed in a stopped state, “RT0” will be elected mainly at “RT1” and hardly appear at “RT0”. In “RT2”, “re-game 04” that can be stopped and displayed in the winning numbers 4 to 6 may appear, but the RT state does not shift even if “re-game 04” is stopped and displayed. If “re-game 04” is stopped and displayed in “RT1”, the transition to “RT0”, that is, the fall effect (eg, the effect display device S40) that informs that the RT state has fallen. If “replay 04” is stopped and displayed at “RT0”, the fall effect may not be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to recognize that BB has been won because the fall effect has not been executed even though “re-game 04” is stopped and displayed. Can increase the sex. In such a configuration, the sound effect output when “re-game 04” is stopped and displayed, and a re-game player other than “re-game 04” (for example, “re-game” in which the RT state does not shift) 01 ”) may be configured to differ from the sound effect that is output due to the stop display, and by doing so, the player recognizes that“ re-game 04 ”is stopped and displayed. It can be configured easily. In addition, a state related to AT in which push order navigation does not occur (for example, “normal gaming state”, sometimes referred to as non-AT gaming state) and a state related to AT in which push order navigation can occur (for example, “ “RT1” may be stayed in both cases of “AT state” and sometimes referred to as AT gaming state). At this time, when a winning number that may shift (fall) from “RT1” to “RT0” is won, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall in a non-AT gaming state is generated. It may be configured not to output based on the operation of the start lever D50. Thereby, in the non-AT gaming state, it is possible to shift the gaming state without making the player realize that there is a possibility of falling to “RT0”. On the other hand, in the AT gaming state, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall is output based on the operation of the start lever (and the re-game player who does not fall the RT state is stopped and displayed. It may be configured to notify the forward navigation). Thus, the player can take care that the RT state does not fall, and can operate the stop button D40 after the special sound effect is notified. In addition, “RT1” is mainly used for “RE GAME 05” that can be stopped and displayed with the winning number 2 or 3 (RE GAME who can be notified that the lottery has been won by adding the AT when stopped in the AT state). It appears at almost no other RT state. In addition, the transition of the state regarding the RT state accompanying the stop display of the symbol combination serving as the re-gamer will be described later. Further, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 can execute push order navigation that notifies the player of the reel stop order that is most advantageous to the player. . It should be noted that there is no problem even if the lottery probability is appropriately changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the bonus is configured to be able to overlap with the small role, and overlaps with a part of watermelon A, watermelon B, and cherry. Specifically, the winning numbers 21 to 23 and the winning numbers 25 to 27 are condition devices in which bonuses and small roles overlap.

  Also, in the situation of “RT2”, since the BB is won and the BB is not activated, the BB role of the winning numbers 20 and 24 (a single role that does not overlap with the small role) In the case of winning a BB combination, which may be referred to as a single BB combination or a single BB), a new winning combination for the BB combination is invalid and only a small combination is effective. Specifically, for example, in the case of “RT2” and winning 1 type BB-A (carrying over), if winning 1 type BB-C is won The one-type BB-C related to the winning number 24 becomes invalid. That is, the situation is the same as in the case where the winning number 0 “losing” is won. Note that the one-type BB-A that has been carried over will continue to be in the winning state. In the situation of “RT2”, since BB has been won and BB has not been activated, the winning combination of winning numbers 21 to 23 and winning numbers 25 to 27 and the winning combination BB If the overlapping condition device is won, the new winning combination of BB is invalid and only winning of the small combination is valid. Specifically, for example, in the case of “RT2” and winning 1 type BB-A (carrying over), winning number 21 “1 type BB-B + winning C” is won 1 type BB-B related to the winning number 21 is invalid and only the winning prize C is valid. That is, the situation is the same as in the case where the winning number 14 “winning-C” is won. Note that the one-type BB-A that has been carried over will continue to be in the winning state. Note that the overlap with the bonus is not limited to the small combination, and may overlap with a part of the re-playing combination. For example, a part of the re-game combination with the winning numbers 4 to 6 may overlap with the bonus combination. As described above, the bonus is won even when the conditional device including the RT transition replay is won by making the bonus overlap with the conditional device including the RT transition replay (replaying player who can transition to the RT state). There is a possibility, and even if the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed, the bonus will not be denied, so that the player can be expected. In such a configuration, control is performed so that the RT state does not shift even when the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player should have transitioned to the RT state (transition to a RT state with a relatively low replay probability), but the replay probability has not become low (frequently replayed), etc. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the fun related to the game, such that the possibility of winning the bonus is high.

  Next, the lottery probability in “1 type BB-A, B, C” at the time of BB operation will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, during the BB operation, the “common bell” with the winning number 13, the “BB medium weak rare combination (diagonal bell alignment)” with the winning number 17 and the “BB medium strong rare small combination with the winning number 18”. (V-shaped bell alignment) "is configured to be elected, and during operation of the BB elected in the" AT state "," BB medium-rare rare role (diagonal bell alignment) " Or, when “BB medium strong rare small role (V-shaped bell set)” is won, AT is added and lottery is executed (details will be described later).

  In the upper part of the figure, the small role appearance rate when the set value is 1 is illustrated. In the common bell (winning number 13), the appearance rate is uniform regardless of the RT state. As shown in the lower part of the figure, the appearance rate of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the set value (six levels in this example). Specifically, the number in the setting 1 is 3204, the number in the setting 2 is 3404, the number in the setting 3 is 3604, the number in the setting 4 is 3904, the number in the setting 5 is 4204, and the number in the setting 6 is 4504, and the higher the set value, the higher the appearance rate. By configuring in this way, for example, when a player progresses a game while measuring the number of appearances (winning number) of the common bell, it is related to the gaming machine that is being played by frequently winning the common bell. The game can proceed while expecting that the set value is a relatively high set value. Further, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value per game, and the higher the set value, the higher the payout rate. Although the appearance rate of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the set value, the AT lottery, the AT extra lottery, and the high probability state transition lottery described later are not executed depending on the winning of the common bell. It is configured so as not to affect the state transition lottery (also referred to as AT lottery).

  The middle part of the figure shows a list of expected values when there is a push order navigation. In the figure, when the push order navigation is executed in a state where the push order navigation can be executed in the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 such as “AT state”, the reels are stopped according to the navigation. The average number of payouts per game (the average number of medals paid out by the winning small role, also referred to as the expected number of game media obtained in one game) and the expected increase or decrease in medals per game ( The ratio of the number of paid-out medals to the number of inserted medals when a game is played with 3 bets. If it is greater than 1, the expected value will be positive and the number of medals will increase. The value will be negative and medals will decrease). In addition, the average number of payouts per game is “total number of re-games (total of numbers for winning numbers 1 to 6) × number of pay-outs in re-games (3) + small role (11” Sum of the number of positions (small part appearance rate) (total number of places for winning numbers 7 to 16) × the number of payouts (11 sheets) for the small part (11 sheets) / sum of all the numbers (65536) ) ". Also, the expected medal increase / decrease value per game can be calculated as “average number of payouts per game / number of medals inserted per game (3)”. The number of medals inserted per game (the number of inserted game media when playing one game) is 3, and when the average number of payouts per game is greater than 3, expected to increase or decrease medals per game The value is configured to be larger than 1. As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, “RT1” has the largest medal increase / decrease expectation value per game. The numbers in the figure do not take into account the increase or decrease in medals due to bonuses. In other words, when the game progresses in a situation where the push order navigation occurs (when operated in the optimum operation mode, also referred to as the advantageous operation mode), medals increase in “RT1”. Although “RT0” and “RT2” are not shown, the expected increase / decrease value per game is a value smaller than 1 in a situation where no push order navigation occurs. Will decrease. In the present embodiment, the expected increase / decrease value per game is greater than 1 when there is push order navigation even in “RT0” or “RT2”, but the present invention is not limited to this. ”Or“ RT2 ”may be configured so that the expected medal increase / decrease value per game when there is push order navigation is smaller than 1. Note that when the combination of symbols to be replayed is stopped and displayed, the bet number (three) in the previous game is actually automatically bet. However, in calculating the expected increase or decrease in medals in this embodiment, The calculation is based on the assumption that three sheets are paid out. One game may be referred to as one game.

  In each RT state, the average number of payouts per game is 3.511129504 when the RT state is “RT0”, and 4.737915039 when the RT state is “RT1”. Is “RT2”, it is 3.671337146. Further, the expected medal increase / decrease value per game in each RT state is 1.170430501 when the RT state is “RT0”, and 1.579305013 when the RT state is “RT1”. When “RT2” is “1.22790487”, when there is push order navigation, the RT state “RT1” is the most advantageous RT state for the player. The numerical value is a value in the case of setting 1. Note that the winning numbers and bonus lottery probabilities relating to the above small role and re-playing role are merely examples. For example, the expected medal increase / decrease value per game in “RT2” where BB is internally established (when there is push order navigation) The expected medal increase / decrease value) may be less than 1. With such a configuration, when a push order navigation occurs and when it is “RT2” (when BB is currently established), when a bonus can not be aligned in a game where the bonus can be aligned However, if the number of held medals gradually decreases and push navigation is generated and “RT2” (when BB is currently established), it is intentional in a game in which bonuses can be aligned. It is possible to prevent a strategy that increases the number of medals by not arranging bonuses.

  Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 12, an electrical schematic configuration of the rotating type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. First, in the spinning-type game machine according to the present embodiment, a sub-control board S, a door board D, a spinning board K, a power board E, a relay board IN, centering on a main control board M that controls the progress of the game, A setting key switch M20, a setting / reset button M30, and the like are connected to be able to exchange data. The solid line portion in the figure shows the movement related to the exchange of data, and the broken line portion in the figure shows the power supply route. The power supply route is not limited to this, and for example, power may be supplied from the power supply board E to the relay board IN and the door board D without going through the main control board.

  The main control board (may be referred to as main control means, main board, main control means, main board, and main game unit) M is a board that governs the progress of the entire game performed in the revolving game machine P. A main control chip C is mounted on the main control board M, and a CPU C 100, a built-in ROM C 110, a built-in RAM C 120, and the like are mounted on the main control chip C so as to be able to exchange data with each other via a bus. The main control board M receives a signal indicating that the start lever D50 or the like has been operated from the door board D mounted on the front door DU, and receives the sub-control board S, the door board D, and the rotating board. The operation of these various boards is controlled by outputting a control command (or control signal) toward K etc. {For example, an instruction number (push order number, instruction information, operation information toward the sub-control board S) The sub-control board S can execute push-push navigation on the effect display device S40}.

  Also, the sub control chip SC is mounted on the sub control board (sometimes referred to as sub control means, sub board, sub control means, sub board, sub game unit) S, as with the above-described main control board M. The sub control chip SC is provided with a CPU SC 100, a ROM, a RAM, and the like, and is connected to be exchanged with each other via a bus. The sub-control board S is connected with various LED lamps S10, a speaker S20, an effect display device S40, a rotating backlight (also referred to as a back lamp) S30, and the like. Here, the spinning backlight S30 is a light that is provided inside each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and illuminates the pattern drawn on the surface of the reel from the back side. The sub-control board S analyzes the control command received from the main control board M, and outputs various drive signals to the various LED lamps S10, the speaker S20, the effect display device S40, the rotary backlight S30, etc. The production of.

  On the door substrate D, the above-described insertion acceptance sensor D10s, first insertion sensor D20s, second insertion sensor D30s, stop button D40 for stopping the rotating reel M50, start for starting the rotation of the reel M50. The lever D50, the stored game medals (credits) and the inserted game medals are paid out, the settlement button D60 for ending the game, and various display panels D70 for displaying the state of the game (not shown but described above) The inserted number display lamp D210, the operation state display lamp D180, the special game state display apparatus D250, the payout number display apparatus (push order display apparatus) D270, the credit number display apparatus D200, the advantageous section display apparatus YH, etc. , A door switch D80 for opening / closing judgment of front door, cancellation of error and change of set value, are turned on Game medals is determined to be incompatible (or other foreign) blocker D100 like to reimburse the outlet D240 and is connected after. The door substrate D is connected to the main control substrate M described above so as to exchange data. For this reason, when a start lever D50, a stop button D40, a settlement button D60, etc. provided on the front door DU are operated, a signal related to the operation is supplied to the main control board M via the door board D. ing. Further, a signal that the insertion acceptance sensor D10s detects the passage of the game medal is also supplied to the main control board M through the door board D.

  In addition, a rotating motor K10 for rotating the reel M50, a rotating sensor K20 for detecting the rotational position of the reel M50, and the like are connected to the rotating substrate K. The spinning board K can stop the reel M50 at the determined stop position by driving the spinning motor K10 while detecting the rotational position of the reel M50 by the spinning sensor K20. Yes. Moreover, in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine of this embodiment, a so-called stepping motor (stepping motor) is used as the spinning cylinder motor K10. In the step motor, 504 steps are set as the number of steps for one rotation of the reel M50. Each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) has a predetermined number of symbols (for example, 20 symbols) having a substantially uniform size, and the number of steps corresponding to one symbol is set. 24 steps (= 20/480) are set. There is no problem even if the number of steps and the number of symbols per reel are changed.

  The medal payout device H is connected to the main control board M via the relay board IN, and pays out a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game medals based on a control signal from the main control board M. Perform the action The medal payout device H includes a first payout sensor H10s and a second payout sensor H20s for determining whether or not a medal has been paid out normally and measuring the number of game medals paid out, and a disk H50. A hopper motor H80 for rotation is connected.

  These various control boards and the power consumed by the boards are supplied from a power supply board E (a board for controlling the presence or absence of power supply by the power switch E10). In FIG. 12, a state in which power is supplied from the power supply board E is represented by a dashed arrow. As shown in the figure, power is directly supplied from the power supply board E to the main control board M and the sub-control board S, and various boards (door board D, rotor board K, relay board IN) Electric power is supplied via the main control board M. A predetermined amount (for example, 100 V) of AC voltage is supplied to the power supply board E, and this electric power is converted into a DC voltage of a specified voltage and then supplied to each control board and board.

  In addition, the main control board M has a setting key switch M20 used for executing a setting change device control process (to change settings), which will be described later, and a setting / reset that can execute setting value change, error cancellation, etc. Button M30 is connected. In addition, the main control board M has a reel control means for controlling the rotation and stop of the reel M50 (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53), and an “AT state” which is a state relating to AT that is advantageous to the player. AT lottery means for executing AT transition lottery for shifting to AT, and AT extra lottery for increasing the number of remaining AT games (or the counter value of the AT counter M60), which is the number of games that can stay in the “AT state” And AT addition lottery means to be executed.

  Next, FIGS. 13 to 31 are flowcharts showing a flow of general processing performed by the main control board M in the present embodiment.

  The flowchart mainly includes processing steps (illustrated by rectangles), judgments (illustrated by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), terminals indicating start / end / return, etc. (illustrated by rounded rectangles). ing. Moreover, when the details are illustrated in another flowchart among the processing steps, those referring to the other flowchart are illustrated as a subroutine (illustrated by a rectangle in which the left and right lines are double lines). . Here, in the development stage of gaming machines, gaming machines with different specifications are also developed at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine ( (Subroutines that are not normally used) are not left behind, and processing related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed due to noise or fraudulent actions is prevented from being executed.

  First, FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of processing executed for the first time by the CPUC 100 of the main control board M after turning on the power of the spinning-reel game machine P (or at the time of system reset or user reset). . First, after turning on the power of the revolving game machine P in step 1000, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a timer interrupt in step 1002 (here, the timer interrupt is not started but the timer interrupt is not started). Only the type of interrupt is set. In the subsequent processing, when a timer interrupt is started, a flowchart related to timer interrupt processing described later is periodically executed). Next, in step 1004, the CPU C 100 of the main control board M executes serial communication settings (speed, data length, data transmission method settings) and the like as function settings of the main control chip C. Next, in step 1006, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M calculates a checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area. Next, in step 1008, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M checks the RAM area (for example, based on the calculated checksum and the checksum data held in the checksum area, power-off / power-off recovery) To check whether the data stored in the built-in RAMC 120 is correctly held), and generates power-off recovery data. Next, in step 1010, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M confirms the switch state of the setting key switch M20. Next, in step 1014, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 is off.

  In the case of Yes in step 1014, in step 1016, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power-off processing completion flag in the RAM (turned on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAMs (in step 1006). Whether or not the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1016, in step 1020, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area within the initialization range determined in step 1018. Next, in step 1022, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M restores the stack pointer based on the data related to the stack pointer stored in the process at power-off (step 1902). Next, in step 1036, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the inside of the RAM area, and determines whether or not the data related to the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1036, in step 1038, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M reads the input port. Next, in step 1040, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M starts the timer interrupt set in step 1002. Next, in step 1042, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the power-off process completion flag and returns to the process at the time of power-off according to the returned stack pointer.

  If NO in step 1016, in step 1024, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a backup error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process described later.

  If No in step 1036, in step 1046, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a setting value error display (for example, displayed on the payout number display device D270) (for example, in the register area). To set). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process described later.

  If NO in step 1014, in step 1028, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power-off processing flag in the RAM (turned on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAMs (step The check result at 1006) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal. In the case of Yes in step 1028, in step 1030, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines and sets the RAM initialization range to a range excluding at least the setting value storage area in the RAM (for example, in the register area). To step 1034. The range not included in the initialization range of the RAM is not limited to the area where the set value is stored. The total cumulative number of games in the “advantageous section” and the total cumulative number of game sections (advantageous period + normal period) As a result of calculating the stay ratio of the “favorable section”, etc. are also included in the RAM initialization range. By configuring in this way, it is possible to calculate and display the ratio of staying in the “favorable section” in the game (advantageous section ratio). The advantageous section ratio calculation process is configured to calculate at the timing when the unit game ends. The advantageous section ratio is displayed when the gaming machine is turned on (for example, displayed on a 4-digit 7-segment display). As a specific display mode, it is repeated at intervals of 5 seconds in the order of “advantageous section ratio → continuous character ratio per 6000 games → characteristic ratio per 6000 games → cumulative continuous character ratio → cumulative character ratio”. Is displayed. The continuous character ratio is “the number of payouts when the RB is in operation / the total number of payouts”. The character ratio is “the number of payouts when the RB, CB, or SB is in operation”. / Total number of payouts ”. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1028, in step 1032 the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines and sets the RAM initialization range to all ranges in the RAM (for example, sets in the register area). 1034. Next, in step 1034, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area within the initialization range determined in step 1030 or step 1032. Next, in step 1100, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a setting change device control process, which will be described later.

  Although not shown, it is preferable that the initial value (value at the start of processing) of the temporary storage area (RAM area or the like) mounted on the main control board M is not a value at which a special game is executed. (In order to prevent a special game from being erroneously executed when a process for determining whether or not to execute a special game is executed due to noise or fraud immediately after the program processing is started). Although not shown, when a random number such as a winning random number is stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, a dedicated storage area is secured, and the byte storing information related to the random number is stored in the byte. It is preferable to configure to store only the information related to the random number (not to store other information such as various timer values) (when operating other data stored in the same 1 byte, due to noise etc. (To prevent the information related to random numbers from being rewritten).

  Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the setting change device control process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. 13, and is also referred to as a setting change mode. First, in step 1102, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a stack pointer (initialized with the start address of the process). Next, in step 1104, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M activates a timer interrupt. Next, in step 1106, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). If the set value is managed from 1 to 6, initialization of the RAM is executed, and when the set value becomes “0”, it is necessary to return to “1”. Therefore, in this example, by managing the normal range of the set value as 0 to 5, the correction process of the set value after executing the initialization of the RAM (the process of Step 1106 and Step 1108) is unnecessary. Thus, the processing time can be shortened and the processing capacity can be reduced. In the case of Yes in Step 1106, in Step 1108, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (for example, 0 = a value that is most disadvantageous for the player) as the set value, and proceeds to Step 1110. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1106, the process proceeds to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (for example, the number-of-payout display device D270) that the setting change device is operating (for example, “88” for lighting all the segments). Then, a setting value is displayed on a setting display LED (not shown) (the display relating to the setting value is a numerical value obtained by adding 1 to the setting value held in the RAM), and the process proceeds to step 1112. As described above, the number-of-payout display device D270 is also used when notifying the pressing order. Since it is configured in this way, for example, when a failure occurs in a part of a 7-segment LED (there is a segment that cannot be lit), an incorrect information can be notified when the push order is notified. possible. In order to prevent such a situation, it is possible to confirm whether or not 7 segments have failed by causing the payout number display device D270 to turn on all the “7” segments during operation of the setting change device. Providing profits can be prevented. In addition, as a configuration related to the display of the set value, there is a storage area of a RAM for setting value display for storing data obtained by adding 1 to the set value in the storage area for storing the set value. Then, the setting value may be displayed. Although not shown, after executing the processing of step 1110, processing for transmitting a command indicating that the mode is changed to the setting change mode is executed to the sub-control board S side.

  Next, in step 1112, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been switched from OFF to ON. In the case of Yes in step 1112, in step 1114, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M adds 1 to the current set value (if the added set value exceeds 5, the set value becomes 0). Then, the process proceeds to step 1116. Note that if the result of Step 1112 is No, the process proceeds to Step 1116. Next, in step 1116, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the start lever D50 has been switched from OFF to ON. In the case of No in step 1116, the process proceeds to step 1112, and the processing in steps 1112 to 1116 is looped. In the case of Yes in step 1116, in step 1118, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 has been switched from on to off. If No in step 1118, the process in step 1118 is looped. On the other hand, if Yes in step 1118, in step 1120, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (not shown) that the operation of the setting change device has been completed, and the setting display LED (not shown) The display of the set value is erased, and the process proceeds to a game progress control process in step 1200. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1120, a process for transmitting a command indicating the end of the setting change mode to the sub-control board S is executed.

  Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of non-recoverable error processing relating to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 13 (and called in another flowchart). First, in step 1302, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M prohibits interruption (hereinafter, a flowchart relating to timer interruption processing described later is not executed). Next, in step 1304, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the output port address and the number of output ports. Next, in step 1306, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the output ports (in this example, 0 to 6, display output to various LEDs and drive output to various motors). Next, in step 1308, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the next port output address (by repeating this, display output to various LEDs and drive output to various motors are sequentially stopped). Next, in step 1310, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not output to each output port has been completed. In the case of Yes in step 1310, in step 1312, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays a set error display (some error has occurred when executing this process), and the process Is repeated, and the reset signal is input when the power supply voltage decreases, and the process ends. (That is, since an infinite loop is entered, any operation that prompts a return is not accepted). In the case of No in step 1310, the process proceeds to step 1306. The processing from step 1306 to step 1310 is processing for clearing the output to the LED / motor (however, since the external output signal is not cleared, information about the error, game progress status at the time of the error, etc. are displayed on the hall computer side. It is possible to output to

  Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a stack pointer (initialized with the start address of the process). Next, in step 1203, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets data in the RAM area necessary for the game (for example, the upper limit of bets, the effective line for winning, etc.). In step 1203, data for clearing the data used in the previous game {eg, condition device number (winning number), production group number, instruction information} (“0” for clearing the RAM address). (Data) is also included in the RAM. In addition, you may make it comprise so that the number selected when the next game was performed may be overwritten, without clearing a condition apparatus number, production group number, instruction information, etc. Next, in step 1204, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the RT state (for example, “RT0” or the like) in the game (sets the RT state determined in step 1704 in FIG. 25). Next, in step 1205, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command related to the RT state set in step 1204 (command to the sub side). Note that the processing for setting the RT state may be executed in step 1704 of FIG. In step 1704, a command related to the RT state (command to the sub side) may be set. Further, when the RT state is transmitted to the sub-side, it is not always necessary to transmit the RT state, and the RT state may be transmitted to the sub-side only when the game section is an “advantageous section”. Next, in step 1206, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a state relating to AT in the game (for example, “AT state”) (in step 1416, step 1428, step 1438, and step 1444 in FIG. 20). Set the status for the determined AT). Next, in step 1207, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command related to the state set in step 1206 (command to the sub side). Further, the process for setting the state relating to the AT may be executed in step 1416, step 1428, step 1438, and step 1444 in FIG. In addition, when the state related to the AT is transmitted to the sub-side, it is not always necessary to transmit the state, and the state related to the AT may be transmitted to the sub-side only when the game section is an “advantageous section”. Next, in step 1208, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a game section (for example, “advantageous section”, etc.) in the game (the game section determined in step 3510, step 3516, and step 3520 in FIG. 29). set). Next, in step 1209, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal payout device H is full of game medals. Specifically, a subtank (not shown) for storing medals overflowing from the medal payout device H is provided, and a determination is made based on current conduction / non-conduction by a plurality of full detection sensors provided in the subtank (via the medal). If the current is conducted, it is determined to be full). If Yes in step 1209, the process proceeds to step 1218.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1209, in step 1210, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to on). ). Next, in step 1212, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays an error number corresponding to the medal full error with a 7-segment LED (for example, a storage display LED or an acquired number LED). Next, in step 1214, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal full error has been canceled (for example, whether or not the current from the sub tank is non-conductive and the set / reset button M30 has been pressed). To do. If Yes in step 1214, in step 1216, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), The process proceeds to 1218. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1214, the process proceeds to step 1212. Next, in step 1218, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M permits the medal insertion acceptance (the insertion operation is automatically executed in the next game of the re-gamer), and the next process (step 1220). The process proceeds to (1). Here, in Step 1218, the blocker D100 is turned on (process formed by the medal flow path). Specifically, when a re-game player is established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is turned on on the condition that the current storage number (credit) is less than a predetermined value (50 in this example). Run. In other words, when the current storage number (credit) is a predetermined value, the ON process of the blocker D100 is not executed. On the other hand, when the re-game combination is not established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is turned on uniformly. With this configuration, even when a re-game player is established, if the number of stored credits does not reach a predetermined value, a game medal can be inserted, such as “RT1”. When you are staying in an RT state (for example, “RT1”) with a higher probability of winning a re-gamer than in the RT state, or re-playing role that is difficult to understand as a re-playing player Even if the bell-bell-bell on the invalid line or the symbol combination in which the cherry is stopped on the left reel is stopped, the player can play the game with a good rhythm (without a sense of incongruity).

  Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1220, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a game medal is bet and no credit exists. In the case of Yes in step 1220, in step 1221, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M satisfies the setting display conditions (for example, the conditions are satisfied when the door switch D80 and the setting key switch M20 are all turned on). Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1221, in step 1222, the CPU C 100 of the main control board M is set to a setting display LED (not shown, but may be a payout number display device D 270, a credit number display device D 200, or an insertion number display light D 210). The value is displayed (transition to the setting confirmation mode), and the process proceeds to step 1221 on condition that the setting key switch M20 is turned off. It should be noted that when the transition condition for the setting change mode is satisfied, a process for transmitting a command indicating that the setting change mode is started to the sub-control board S side, and when the end condition for the setting change mode is satisfied, the setting change mode is set. A process for transmitting a command indicating that the process is to be terminated is executed. In the case of No in step 1220 or step 1221, in step 1224, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes management related to game medal insertion and settlement. Next, in step 1225, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M confirms the number of game medals that can be accepted. Next, in step 1226, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the blocker D100 is on. In the case of Yes in step 1226, in step 1227, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is on (in this embodiment, the medal is inserted). There are two insertion sensors for detection, and when the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one game medal has been received). In the case of Yes in step 1227, in step 1230, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are off (the first input sensor D20s or the second input). When the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are turned off after the sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one received game medal has passed the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. ). In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1231, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the insertion of one normal game medal has been accepted. Although not shown, after step 1231, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the credit is the upper limit number (50 in this example) and the bet number is the maximum number (3 in this example). If the determination is Yes, the blocker D100 is controlled to be off (a state where no medal flow path is formed). If No in step 1230, the process in step 1230 is repeated, and if no in step 1226 or step 1227, the process proceeds to step 1232.

  Next, in step 1232, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the settlement button D60 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1232, in step 1233, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there are remaining credits or bet gaming medals. In the case of Yes in step 1233, in step 1234, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on a hopper drive flag (a flag in the RAM area, which is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is driven), and the game The payout of one medal is executed. Next, in step 1236, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (in this embodiment, for detecting the payout of medals). It has two payout sensors, and when the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal is being performed). If Yes in step 1236, the process proceeds to step 1247. Here, although not explicitly shown in the flowchart, only the remaining number of credits is to be settled when the previous game was a re-game player.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1236, in step 1241, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the processing timing of step 1234). . Specifically, whether or not a situation in which it is determined that a medal has not been paid out has continued for a predetermined period of time despite transmission of a hopper drive signal to the hopper motor H80 (the hopper motor H80 is rotating). Determine whether or not. If YES in step 1241, in step 1242, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 1244, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display. Next, in step 1245, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been canceled (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in step 1245, in step 1246, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to OFF). The process proceeds to 1247. On the other hand, if No at step 1245, the process proceeds to step 1244.

  Next, in step 1247, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). Then, when the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal on which the payout operation has been performed is completed). In the case of Yes in step 1247, in step 1248, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1233. If step 1241 or step 1247 is No, the process proceeds to step 1236.

  On the other hand, if No in Step 1232 or Step 1233, the CPU C100 of the main control board M has a valid start lever D50 in Step 1251 (for example, a specified number of game medals for starting a game have been inserted, etc.) ) And whether or not the start lever D50 has been operated is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1251, in step 1253, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the set value in the RAM area is within a normal range (0 to 5 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1253, in step 1254, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M performs processing for acquiring random numbers and turning off the blocker D100, and then proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 3600). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1253, in step 1256, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a setting value error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process. If the result is No in step 1251, the process proceeds to step 1220.

  Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 3600, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an internal lottery execution process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1400, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an AT state transition control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1450, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a conditional device number management process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1259, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state regarding the AT is a state in which the AT can be added and lottery is possible. Here, the states related to the AT capable of executing the AT addition lottery according to the present embodiment are “AT in-state”, “Additional special state”, “Specialization precursor state”, “Advantageous BB state”, The “advantageous BB inside game” is configured such that the AT counter value can be greater than 0, but the AT lottery is not executed. This is to prevent the player from making it difficult for the player not to make the symbol combination of the BB intentional in the “advantageous BB inside game”. In addition, it may be configured to be able to execute a lottery by adding AT in “advantageous BB inside game”. In such a case, the AT addition lottery is won in “advantageous BB inside game”. Alternatively, it may be configured not to notify immediately but to notify that the BT is completed and that the AT is added and the lottery is won, or the number of AT remaining games after the number of AT games is added. In the case of Yes in step 1259, in step 1500, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a game number addition execution process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1550. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1259, the process proceeds to step 1550. In this game number addition execution process, it is possible to execute a lottery using a different lottery table depending on the state related to the AT, but the lottery probability does not vary depending on the set value (using the same lottery table). It is preferable to execute a lottery.

  Here, states related to the AT in this example will be listed and described in detail (also shown in the AT state transition diagram of FIG. 28). (1) The “low probability state” is a state in which an AT has not been won (a right to shift to an “AT state” has not been acquired) and a bonus combination has not been won. (2) “Normal BB inside game” is a state where the BB combination is won in the “low probability state” and the BB combination is not won. (3) “Normal BB state” corresponds to the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed in the “low probability state”, or the “BB internal role game” corresponds to the BB role This is a state executed when the symbol combination to be stopped is displayed. (4) The “high probability state” is a state where the AT is not won (the right to shift to the “AT state” is not acquired) and the bonus combination is not won. This is a state where it is easier to win the AT than the “low probability state” described above. (5) The “AT state” is a state in which AT (push order navigation) is performed and the number of remaining AT games (AT counter value) is subtracted. (6) The “specialized sign state” is a state in which the right to shift to the “specialized state of addition”, which is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively easy to add compared to the “AT state”, is acquired. . (7) “Additional special state” is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively easily increased compared to the “AT state”. (8) “Advantageous BB inside game” means winning in the BB role in the “high probability state”, “AT state”, “specializing sign state” or “additional special state”, and the BB role You have not won a prize. (9) The “advantageous BB state” means that the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role that is won by the BB role in the “high probability state”, “AT state”, “specialized sign state”, or “addition special state” This is a state that is executed when the display is stopped or when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the “advantageous BB inside game”.

  Next, in step 1550, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a reel rotation start preparation process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1260, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M starts to rotate all reels. Next, in step 1261-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M requests a pull-in point creation (requested to determine the stop positions of the rotating left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53, and the stop order). And the other reels are appropriately requested according to the stop position of the other reels). In the case of Yes in step 1261-1, in step 1261-2, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not it is “BB inside game”. Here, “BB inside game” is a general term for “ordinary BB inside game” and “advantageous BB inside game”, and is a state in which BB is won and BB has not won a prize. . If YES in step 1261-2, the process proceeds to step 1262. On the other hand, if No in Step 1261-2, in Step 1261-3, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a push order bell (winning-A1 to winning-A6). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1261-3, in step 1261-4, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M creates a pull-in point that is the maximum payout number (11 in this example), and proceeds to step 1263. If the answer is No in step 1261-3, the process proceeds to step 1262. Next, in step 1262, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M creates a pull-in point, and proceeds to step 1263. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1261-1, the process proceeds to step 1263. In this way, in the “BB inside game”, in the game winning the push order bell, the stop button was not stopped in the correct push order of 11 payouts (for example, in the case of winning-A1) Even when the stop buttons are not stopped in the order of “left → middle → right” (when the reels are stopped in the order of pressing the wrong answer), there are 11 symbol combinations to be paid out by the reel stop control. It is configured to win. Next, in step 1263, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a reel stop acceptance check. Next, in step 1264, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether any stop button (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1264, in step 1265, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button (for example, the left reel M51 corresponds to the left stop button D41). Then, the process proceeds to step 1266. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1264, the process proceeds to step 1266. Next, in step 1266, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an all reel stop check process. Next, in step 1267, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether all the reels (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53) have stopped. In the case of Yes in step 1267, in step 1268, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M compares the symbol stop position data in the RAM with the internal winning combination stop possible position data. Next, in step 1269, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the displayed symbol combination is normal (if it does not coincide with the winning combination determined by the internal lottery, it is abnormal. Is determined). If Yes in step 1269, the process proceeds to step 1274. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1269, in step 1270, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a display determination error display (for example, sets in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process. On the other hand, if No in step 1267, the process proceeds to step 1261.

  Next, in step 1274, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a game medal payout process by winning. Next, in step 1275, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a prize for paying out game medals {the game medals earned by winning the prize exceeds the maximum number of credits (50 in this example). If so, game medals are paid out}. In the case of Yes in step 1275, in step 1276, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on a hopper drive flag (a flag that is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is driven), and pays out one game medal. . Next, in step 1277, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). Then, it is determined that one game medal is being paid out). If Yes in step 1277, the process proceeds to step 1286.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1277, in step 1279, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the processing timing in step 1276). . In the case of Yes in step 1279, in step 1280, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 1281, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display with a 7-segment LED. Next, in step 1282, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been canceled (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in Step 1282, in Step 1283, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to OFF). Move to 1286. On the other hand, if No in step 1282, the process proceeds to step 1281.

  Next, in step 1286, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). Then, when the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal on which the payout operation has been performed is completed). In the case of Yes in step 1286, in step 1288, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1290. If No in step 1279 or step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277. Next, in step 1290, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout corresponding to the winning (the winning that becomes Yes in step 1275) is completed. If Yes in step 1290, the process proceeds to step 3400. If No in step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277. If No in step 1275, the process proceeds to step 3400. If No in step 1290, the process proceeds to step 1276.

  Next, in step 3400, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a remaining game number management process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1700, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes RT state transition control processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 1750, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an AT state start control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 3500, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a game section transition control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1293, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes game end processing (for example, clearing the number of bets, game state transition processing, etc.), and proceeds to the next processing (step 1202 processing).

  Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of an internal lottery execution process according to the subroutine of Step 3600 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 3602, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an internal lottery table (a table used when executing an internal lottery in which a winning number, a numerical value for comparison with the obtained random number, and the like are stored). Then, the process proceeds to step 3604. Next, in step 3604, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires a winning number related to the set internal lottery table address. The winning / replay winning information can be generated from the winning number. In addition, if a bonus and a small role are both won, or a bonus and a replaying player are both won, both the winning / replaying winning information and the bonus winning information are determined from the winning number. Winning information can be generated. Specific generation processing will be described later. Next, in step 3606, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires the number of repetitions related to the set internal lottery table address. Here, the number of repetitions is the number of consecutive winning numbers having the same appearance group number and the same number for comparison with the obtained random number, and stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board M. It is remembered. For example, the winning group number 2 includes nine winning numbers of winning numbers 4 to 12, and the same number is set for three consecutive winning numbers 4 to 6 that are push-order re-game players. Since the above-mentioned number is the same for the six consecutive winning numbers 7 to 12 that are the push order bell combination, the number of repetitions related to the push order replay game combination is 3, and the push order bell The number of repetitions related to the combination is 6. In addition, the lottery table used when winning numbers 4-6, which are push order re-games, and the lottery table used when winning numbers 7-12, which are push order bells, are acquired as a single lottery table. It is configured. Next, in step 3608, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M obtains the payout group number related to the set internal lottery table address, and proceeds to step 3610.

  Next, in step 3610, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires set value data. Next, in step 3612, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires designated address data. Next, in step 3614, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the internal lottery is won (whether or not the acquired random number exists in the internal lottery table searched this time). In the case of Yes in step 3614, since it is determined that the internal lottery has been won, the subsequent internal lottery table address is not determined (lottery) and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3614, in step 3616, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M updates the number of repetitions. Next, in step 3618, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether there is a remaining number of repetitions. In the case of Yes in step 3618, the process proceeds to step 3610, and the processing of step 3610 to step 3618 is repeatedly executed until there is no remaining number of repetitions or the internal lottery is won. If NO in step 3618, in step 3620, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M updates the internal lottery table address (updates to the address related to the next payout group number), proceeds to step 3604, and proceeds to step 3604. The subsequent processing is executed. The specific process of the internal lottery will be described later.

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process according to the subroutine of Step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1402, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state relating to the AT is a state relating to the AT capable of performing AT lottery. In the present embodiment, the state related to the AT that can execute the AT lottery is only the “high probability state”. By winning the BB in the “high probability state”, the “advantageous BB internal game” Then, when the BB combination wins, it shifts to the “advantageous BB state”, and when the executed BB ends, it shifts to the “AT state” and the AT counter shows the initial number of AT games. The value 50 times will be set. In addition, even if BB is won in the “low probability state”, the game shifts to “normal BB inside game”, and then does not shift to “AT state”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the BB is won in the “normal game state”, the AT lottery may be won by using the BB combination as a trigger. In such a configuration, when BB is won in the “normal game state”, if the AT lottery is won with the BB role as an opportunity, the game shifts to “advantageous BB inside game” and then BB By aligning, it shifts to the “advantageous BB state”. In addition, in a state in which the BB is won in the “normal game state” and the BB is not aligned, the game section may be an “advantageous section” or a “standby section”. In the case of Yes in step 1402, in step 1404, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is an AT lottery combination (in this example, a BB combination). In the case of Yes in step 1404, in step 1406, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as “advantageous BB inside game”, and proceeds to step 1408. Also in the case of No in step 1402 or step 1404, the process proceeds to step 1408. In the present embodiment, the AT winning rate related to AT lottery (whether or not it can be won or not) is different when the state related to AT is different, but when the state related to AT is the same. Even if the set values are different, the AT winning rate related to the AT lottery is the same (if the BB is won in the “high probability state”, the AT is always won regardless of the set value = It shifts to “AT state”).

  Next, in step 1408, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the current AT is a “low probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 1408, in step 1410, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is a state promotion role (by winning, a small state that can shift from the “low probability state” to the “high probability state”). It is determined whether or not it is a hand and is a cherry) in this example. In the case of Yes in step 1410, in step 1412, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is elected with a predetermined probability (in this example, it is ½ and there is no problem if it is changed if it is not different depending on the set value). Execute a high probability state transition lottery. Next, in step 1414, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed high probability state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1414, in step 1416, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as “high probability state”, and proceeds to step 1430.

  In the case of No in step 1408, in step 1418, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state regarding the AT is a “high probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 1418, in step 1420, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is a state falling role (a role that can be shifted from the “high probability state” to the “low probability state” by winning). In this example, it is determined whether or not the game is replay-A). In the case of Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is elected with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/5, and if it does not differ depending on the set value, there is no problem). A low probability state transition lottery is executed. Next, in step 1424, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed low probability state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1424, in step 1426, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the low probability transition condition is satisfied. Here, in this embodiment, when the state related to the AT is “high probability state”, the game section is “advantageous section”, and when the game section is “advantageous section”, the push order is The “advantageous section” is configured not to end unless the navigation is executed one or more times or a predetermined number of games (in this example, 1500 games) “advantageous section” is not satisfied. Even if the low-probability state transition lottery is won, the “high-probability state” is configured not to end if the low-probability transition condition is not satisfied because, for example, the push order navigation has not been executed more than once. ). In the case of Yes in step 1426, in step 1428, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as “low probability state”, and proceeds to step 1430. Note that the process also proceeds to step 1430 even in the case of No in step 1410, step 1414, step 1418, step 1420, step 1424 or step 1426. Note that such a lottery method is merely an example. For example, after shifting to the “high probability state”, the low probability state transition lottery is not executed for 10 games (staying in the “high probability state” is guaranteed). ), A lottery that shifts from a “high probability state” to a “low probability state” with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20) in each game after the 10 games have elapsed may be executed. It should be noted that the AT lottery (low-accuracy AT lottery, high-accuracy AT lottery) and the state promotion combination have the same winning probability in all set values.

  Next, in step 1430, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is an “AT-in-progress state”. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1431, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the AT counter M60 is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (11 in this example). Here, in the present embodiment, when the state relating to AT is “AT state”, when the AT counter value is 11 or more, in other words, when the number of AT remaining games is 11 or more, the watermelon B In the case where the right to transition to the “specialized state of specialization” can be acquired with a probability of ½ when winning, and the state related to the AT is “in-AT state” When the AT counter value is 10 or less, in other words, when the number of AT remaining games is 10 games or less, even if the watermelon B is won, a lottery (specializing) (Which may also be referred to as state transition lottery), and is not configured to shift to the “specialization sign state” and “additional special state”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the AT counter value is 10 or less, a lottery to win the watermelon B and acquire the right to shift to the “additional special state” (also referred to as a special state transfer lottery) May be configured so that the watermelon B is won in the situation where the AT counter value is 10 or less and the right to transition to the “additional specialization state” is granted. When winning the lottery to be won, it may be configured so that the next game winning the lottery can be (specialized sign state) or “additional special state” (can move to), or the AT counter value It may be configured to be able to enter (or move to) a “specialized sign state” or “additional special state” when the game becomes a predetermined value (for example, 1 or 0), or a game won in the lottery After the execution of a predetermined number of games, "Plus specialized state" and can become (may transition to) as may be configured. In addition, it is not always necessary to go through the “specialization sign state” when shifting to the “additional special state”. May be. In the case of Yes in step 1431, in step 1432, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a lottery that acquires the right to transfer to the special transition role ("addition special state") for the condition device related to the game. It is determined whether it is a watermelon B) in this example. In the case of Yes in step 1432, in step 1434, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a special state transition lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/2). Next, in step 1436, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed specialized state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1436, in step 1438, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game as “specialized sign state”, and proceeds to step 1440. It should be noted that the process proceeds to step 1440 also in the case of No in step 1430, step 1431, step 1432, or step 1436.

  Next, in step 1440, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a state related to the AT after the next game has not been determined. In the case of Yes in step 1440, in step 1442, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state transition condition regarding the AT is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. Satisfies when 10 games, which are the number of precursor games, are consumed in the “state”). In the case of Yes in step 1442, in step 1444, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game (for example, as shown in FIG. If the number of games has been digested, it is determined to be “additional specialization state”, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1450). Even in the case of No in step 1440, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1450).

  In the present embodiment, the AT winning rate is different depending on the lottery state. When the BB role is won in the “low probability state”, the AT transition lottery is not won (then, the “AT in-state state”). On the other hand, in the case of winning the BB role in the “high probability state”, the AT transition lottery is won (then, the state is shifted to the “AT state”). However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the condition device A, which is a predetermined condition device, is used as an AT lottery and has a “high probability state A” and a “high probability state B” as states related to the AT, which is an “advantageous section”, If the condition device A is won in the “probability state A”, the AT transfer lottery is won at 1/10. If the condition device A is won in the “high probability state B”, the AT transfer lottery is halved. You may be configured to win. If the AT transfer lottery is won, the state relating to AT shifts to “AT ready state” which is a preparation state until the state shifts to “AT in-progress state”, and then a predetermined end condition (for example, “AT ready state”). It may be configured to transition to the “AT state” when 10 games have passed since the transition to the “state”.

  Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of conditional device number management processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1451, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game section is an “advantageous section”. In the case of Yes in step 1451, in step 1452, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is a command related to winning / replaying winning information (a command on the sub-control board S side, for example, winning / replaying winning related to the game) Set commands related to information. Next, in step 1454, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M has a condition device related to the game in a pushing order (a condition device having a different winning combination depending on the pushing order, for example, winning-A1 etc.). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1454, in step 1458, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines an instruction number (also referred to as a pressing order number) in the game based on the winning / replay winning information related to the game, The number is stored in a RAM address (an address different from the RAM address for displaying push order navigation). The instruction number is information related to the order of pressing, and in this example, the main control board M is determined and transmitted to the sub control board S (details will be described later). Further, the sub control board S can display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 by receiving the instruction number. Note that the instruction number is determined (not shown, but the instruction number becomes an initial value based on clearing the instruction number) even when the push order navigation is not executed. In addition, when a pushing order hitting game is executed, a predetermined instruction number (for example, AX) dedicated to the pushing order hitting game may be determined. Next, in step 1460, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 based on the instruction number related to the game. Next, in step 1466, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the instruction number determined in step 1458 (for example, sets in the register area), and proceeds to step 1472. . In this example, displaying the stop order of the reels that is most profitable to the player in the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is referred to as push order navigation, push order navigation display, and the like. ing. In this embodiment, the push order navigation is displayed based on the instruction number. For example, the push order of “left → middle → right” is displayed as “= 1” on the push order display device D270. In both of the push order bell and the push order replay, “= 1” is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the game related to the push order bell, the case where the push order navigation “left → middle → right” is displayed on the push order display device D270 and in the game related to the push order replay game, “ You may comprise so that it may become a display mode different from the case where the push order navigation of "left-> middle-> right" is displayed on the push order display apparatus D270. That is, the number of types of display of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 may be the same as the number of types of winning / replay winning information.

  If NO in step 1451 or 1454, in step 1468, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a mask process on the winning / replaying winning information of the game, and the masked information is stored in a predetermined address of the RAM. To remember. Here, when the winning / replaying winning information related to the game is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, if the winning / replaying winning information is recognized by an illegal act, the high profit related to the game is increased. That is, the pushing order (reel stop order) will be recognized. Therefore, in this example, the sub-control board S is executed after executing the mask process {the process for concealing the winning / replay winning information (especially the information relating to the pressing order)) to the winning / replaying winning information related to the game. It is configured so that a highly profitable push order cannot be recognized. As a mask processing method in this embodiment, a plurality of winning / replaying winning information (winning / replaying winning information having the same role is preferable. For example, the RT state shifts depending on the pressing order. A plurality of winning / replaying winning information that can be stopped and displayed as a combination of symbols to be replayed as a single effect group number (for example, winning / replay winning information 4 to 6 is set as a directing group 4) The group number is transmitted to the sub-control board S side. The mask processing method is not limited to this. For example, after the winning / replay winning information provided (0 to 18 in this example), a new winning / replaying after mask processing is performed. You may comprise so that winning information may be provided. Also in such a case, a plurality of winning / replaying winning information among the existing winning / replaying winning information like the production group number is used as a single winning / replaying winning information after winning / replaying after masking. It is desirable to provide game winning information (for example, winning / replaying winning information 4 to 6 is changed to winning / replaying winning information 19 which is winning / replaying winning information after mask processing)・ Replay winning information)). If it is determined that the game is a game for notifying operation information (push order navigation) based on the state related to the AT on the main control board M, the winning / replaying winning information is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, In a game in which the operation information is not notified, the production group number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side. In such a configuration, the command related to the instruction number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side or may not be transmitted.

  Next, in step 1470, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the effect group number after executing the mask processing (for example, sets in the register area). 1472 is entered. Next, in step 1472, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to bonus winning information (whether or not the bonus has been won can be recognized on the sub side) (for example, Set in the register area) and proceed to the next process (the process of step 1259). In this embodiment, the winning / replay winning information and the bonus winning information are derived from the winning number. The derivation method will be described later. In addition, as shown in the lower part of the figure, examples of the display of the push order navigation include: (1) When a fall re-playing role is included → Push where a fall re-playing role is not stopped and displayed In the case of navigation in order, (2) in the case of a bell (one-piece combination / 11-piece combination) → the navigation order in which the number of payouts becomes the largest is navigated. Thus, in the present embodiment, when the game section is an “advantageous section”, winning / re-game winning information (the type of winning combination and the pushing order most advantageous for the player) In the case where the game section is a “normal section”, the sub control board S is configured to transmit the instruction number (the number that can specify the pushing order most advantageous for the player). The production group number (a number that can specify only the outline of the winning combination) can be transmitted to the side. That is, in the “advantageous section”, the winning / replaying winning information related to the game including the winning / replaying winning information in which the game result and the player's profit differ depending on the pushing order is directly used as the sub control board S side On the other hand, in a game section that is not an “advantageous section”, the winning / replaying information for the game is not transmitted, and the winning / replaying in which the result of the game and the player's profit differ depending on the push order In the case of winning information, the production group number in which the information related to the order is concealed is transmitted to the sub-control board S side.

  When the game section is not an “advantageous section”, the effect group number is determined by executing the mask process when the winning / replay winning information determined by the main control board M is transmitted to the sub control board S. The production group number is transmitted to the sub control board S. The production group number refers to winning / replaying winning information, winning / replaying winning information related to a winning role having a similar role (for example, a replaying role including a falling replaying role, a push order bell, etc.). Are grouped and assigned numbers. A mask process {process for concealing winning / replay winning information (especially information relating to the pressing order)} is performed on the winning / replaying winning information related to the game, and then transmitted to the sub-control board S. Thus, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the information related to the winning / replaying winning information is recognized due to an illegal act and the pushing order (reel stop order) which is a high profit related to the game is recognized.

  Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution process according to the subroutine of Step 1500 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1502, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state relating to the AT is “AT in-progress state”, “specialization precursor state”, or “addition special state”. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the game group number related to the game is an additional role during AT (a winning number that can add the number of remaining AT games in the “AT state”). In this example, it is determined whether or not it is a payout group number (1, 3 in this example) regarding replay-B, replay-C, and winning-D. If Yes in step 1504, the process proceeds to step 1514. Further, in the case of No in step 1502, in other words, if the state relating to AT is the advantageous BB state, in step 1512, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the outgoing group number relating to the game is the upper part of the BB (" Whether or not it is the winning group number (5, 6 in this example) related to winning-H, winning-I in this example, which is the winning number that can be added to the number of remaining AT games in the “favorable BB state” Determine. If Yes in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1514, and if No in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1518. In the case of No in step 1504, in step 1506, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT is “additional special state”. In the case of Yes in Step 1506, in Step 1508, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M can add the number of AT games remaining in the special role group number for the game (in the “Specialization state for addition”) and In “AT state”, it is a winning number that does not increment the number of remaining AT games, and in this example, it is a replay-A, replay-D1-D3, winning-A1-A6). It is determined whether or not (2, 13 in this example). If Yes in step 1508, the process proceeds to step 1514. If step 1506 or step 1508 is No, the process proceeds to step 1518.

  Next, in step 1514, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the extra game number lottery table at the time of winning, and determines the AT extra game number based on the game group number related to the game (for example, in the margin) In the lottery table shown, it is determined whether or not the latched random value falls within the range). Note that determining the number of AT extra games is also referred to as performing AT extra lottery. Next, in step 1516, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M adds the determined AT added game number to the counter value of the AT counter M60, and sets the added AT counter value in the AT counter M60. Next, in step 1517, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M receives a command related to the determined AT added game number (a command to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S receives the command, It is possible to recognize whether or not the number of AT games has been added and how many games have been added), and the process proceeds to step 1518. It should be noted that a lottery related to AT (AT lottery, AT extra lottery) can also be executed in the case of a payout group number 7 to 11 which is a payout group number related to a win number (winning numbers 19 to 27) including a bonus. .

  Here, the lottery table shown outside the figure is an example of the extra game number lottery table at the time of winning, and in this embodiment, a part of the state related to the AT in which push order navigation is executed (in this example, “ In the case of the winning combination in the winning state in the “AT state”, “specialized sign state”, “addition special state”, “advantageous BB state”), based on the appearance group number related to the game, As the number of AT added games, “0” to “300” are determined by lottery, and the determined value is added to the counter value of the AT counter M60. When “0” is determined, the AT remaining game number does not increase (when “0” is determined, the AT addition lottery may be referred to as non-winning).

  Further, the average value (expected value) of the number of AT added games when winning the winning combination at the time of winning is a value as shown in the figure. As a specific calculation method, the winning combination is watermelon A. In this case, {place number (600) × AT additional game number (0) + placement number (100) × AT additional game number (10) + placement number (300) × AT additional game number (30) + placement number ( 24) × AT addition number of games (100)} / total number of entries (1024) = 12.1 (game).

  Next, when the winning combination is re-game-B or re-game-C, {place number (500) × AT extra game number (0) + place number (200) × AT extra game number (50) + Number (300) × AT additional game number (100) + Number (24) × AT additional game number (300)} / total number of positions (1024) = 46.1 (game) be able to.

  Next, if the winning combination is re-game-A or re-game-D1-D3, winnings-A1-A6, {number (300) × AT extra game number (10) + number (600) × The number of AT extra games (30) + the number of places (124) × the number of AT extra games (50)} / the total number of places (1024) = 26.61 (game). In addition, when the winning combination is re-game-A or re-game-D1-D3, winnings-A1-A6, the number of AT games is added only when the status related to AT is "addition specialization state" It has become.

  Next, if the winning combination is a BB medium rare role, {number (800) × AT added game number (0) + place number (100) × AT added game number (10) + place number (100 ) × AT additional game number (30) + placement number (24) × AT additional game number (100)} / total number of placement numbers (1024) = 6.3 (game).

  Next, in the case where the winning combination is a BB medium rare role, {number (300) × AT added game number (0) + number (300) × AT added game number (30) + number (400) ) × AT additional game number (50) + placement number (24) × AT additional game number (300)} / total number of placement numbers (1024) = 35.4 (game).

  In this embodiment, when the AT extra lottery is executed, the average value of the AT extra game number may be different depending on the type of the winning combination, but depending on the set value, the AT extra game number may be different. The average value is configured not to be different. Here, in the case where the AT addition lottery is executed based on the winning number, for example, when the same processing is executed as the AT extra lottery with the winning number 7 and the winning number 8, the winning number is 7. However, as shown in the present embodiment, the winning number 7 and the winning number 8 are configured by performing the AT lottery based on the appearance group number as in the present embodiment. When the same process is executed as an AT extra lottery, the process related to the AT extra lottery of the winning number 7 and the winning number 8 is executed only by determining whether the payout group number is 2 or not. Will be able to.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, next, in step 1518, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M may make a determination based on a winning number (or winning / replaying winning information, a winning group number, etc.) related to the game. ) Determines whether or not it is a winning number related to re-game-B (reverse-play white 7 replay which is a re-game in which white seven can be aligned with the invalid line by stopping by reverse-press). In the case of Yes in step 1518, in step 1520, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is an additional number of AT games due to replay-B, in other words, the number of AT additional games due to winning of replay-B is It is determined whether it was not 0. In the case of Yes in step 1520, in step 1522, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M makes an invalid line by reverse pressing instruction command (command to the sub control board S side and reverse pressing ("right → middle → left")). To perform the effect of instructing to align white seven), and the process proceeds to step 1526. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1520, in step 1524, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is a command other than the reverse push (“right → middle → left”) which is a reverse push avoidance command (a command to the sub control board S side). The order of pressing is instructed, and an effect that prevents white seven from being aligned on the invalid line is set), and the process proceeds to step 1526. In the case of No in step 1518, the process proceeds to step 1526. Next, in step 1526, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the winning number related to the game (or may be determined by winning / replaying winning information, or a payout group number, etc.) as replay-C ( It is determined whether or not it is a forward-pressed black 7 replay, which is a re-game where the black seven can be aligned with the invalid line by stopping by forward-pressing. In the case of Yes in step 1526, in step 1528, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is an additional number of AT games by replay-C, in other words, the number of additional games AT by winning replay -C is It is determined whether it was not 0. In the case of Yes in step 1528, in step 1530, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M makes an invalid line by a forward press instruction command (command to the sub control board S side and forward press ("left → middle → right")). Will be executed to instruct the black seven to be aligned), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1528, in step 1532, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is a command other than the forward press avoidance command (command to the sub control board S side, forward press (“left → middle → right”)). The order of pressing is instructed, and an effect to prevent black sevens from being aligned on the invalid line is set), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550). Even in the case of No in step 1526, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1550). In this embodiment, a reverse push instruction command, a reverse push avoid command, a forward push instruction command, and a forward push avoid command are transmitted to the sub control board S, and the sub control board S receives these commands, thereby Although it is configured to be able to execute effects related to push order navigation on the control board S side, the present invention is not limited to this, and when winning an AT extra lottery, the fact that the AT extra lottery is won and the number of AT extra games is affected. When a command (for example, a command related to the number of AT additional games related to the processing in step 1517) is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S side receives the command, push-sequence navigation on the sub-control board S side You may comprise so that the execution timing and production aspect of production may be determined. As an example, the replay-B is a game that has been won, and an effect mode in which reverse pressing is instructed in a game that has received the command on the side of the sub-control board S (a game with an additional number of AT games) is selected. In the game that receives the command on the side of the sub-control board S, an effect that instructs reverse pressing is not executed, and a predetermined condition (for example, a specific re-game player (for example, replay) You may comprise so that the effect which instruct | indicates the pushing order in which 7 alignment can be performed in an invalid line in the game which satisfied game-B or C) was won may be performed. Or, in the game where the re-game-B is won and the command is received on the side of the sub-control board S (game with an additional number of AT games), the effect of instructing reverse pressing is not executed, (For example, display on the effect display device S40) in a game satisfying a predetermined condition (for example, after a predetermined number of games (a continuous effect may be executed simultaneously, in this case, the final game of the continuous effect). (For example, “+ 30G” is displayed.) In this example, the number of AT remaining games is also displayed in the effect display device S40. Such a display can be displayed, and the display and the number of remaining AT games stored on the main control board side may be the same or different from each other. B won In a game where the command is received on the side of the sub-control board S (a game with an additional number of AT games), an effect of instructing reverse pressing is not executed, and a game satisfying a predetermined condition thereafter As an example of the case where the AT game number addition effect is executed, when a special effect (for example, a predetermined continuous effect) is given on the sub-control board S side to win a bonus (replay game inside the bonus- Since the winning probability of B is low (including 0%), the sub-control board S side will be special, for example, if a player is notified of the push order in which 7 matches are possible, the bonus will not be won) Information that the sub-control board S side determines that the main control board M side wins the AT addition lottery and the AT remaining game number is added, is as follows. (1) AT remaining game The information on the number is added to the AT and sent after the lottery from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and then the sub control board S side sends the information on the number of AT remaining games sent last time and the AT remaining game sent this time. The difference with the number information is calculated, and the number of AT added games won in the AT added lottery is grasped. (2) The command related to the number of AT added games obtained as a result of the AT added lottery on the main control board M side is In addition, when the AT extra lottery is not won, a command indicating that the AT extra lottery is not won is sent to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side When receiving a command, the sub-control board S may be configured to determine an effect mode of an effect related to push order navigation, for example, a game in which Re-Game-B is won. Then, in the game that received the command on the side of the sub-control board S (the game in which the number of AT games was not added), the middle press (the middle stop button is operated as the first stop, and the push order to avoid the seven matches) You may comprise so that the production | generation aspect which instruct | indicates may be selected and performed. In addition, although the AT addition lottery was executed on the main control board M side, as information for the sub control board S side to determine that the AT remaining game number was not added, (1) information on the AT remaining game number After the AT addition lottery, the data is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. Thereafter, the sub-control board S calculates the difference between the information regarding the number of remaining AT games transmitted last time and the information regarding the number of remaining AT games transmitted this time, and grasps the number of AT additional games won in the AT addition lottery. (If the value obtained by subtracting the information related to the number of remaining AT games transmitted this time from the information related to the number of remaining AT games transmitted last time is 1, it is determined that the AT addition lottery was not won), (2) the main control board As a result of the M-side AT extra lottery, a command related to the fact that the number of AT extra games is 0 is transmitted to the sub-control board S side.

  Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of reel rotation start preparation processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1552, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 (subtraction timer) is zero. Here, the game interval minimum time timer M70 is a time (4.1 seconds in this example) that should be secured from a certain game start timing (reel rotation start timing) to the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing). It is a timer that measures. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M newly sets a minimum time (4.1 seconds in this example) to the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 and starts. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1552, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process. Next, in step 1556, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears information related to the reel stop order related to the finished game and information related to the press order. Next, in step 1558, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the reel stop related to the finished game and the pull-in point creation request. Next, in step 1560, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M initializes symbol stop position data relating to the finished game. Next, in step 1562, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an output request at the start of reel rotation related to the game. Next, in step 1564, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a reel control command related to the game. In other words, a command for indicating that the reel starts to rotate can be transmitted to the sub-control board S by the processing of Step 1562 and Step 1564. Next, in step 1566, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M updates the reel drive state stored in the RAM area from the reel stop state to the reel rotation start standby state, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1260). Transition.

  Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process according to the subroutine of step 3400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 3402, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game section is an “advantageous section”. Although the details will be described later, the “advantageous section” is one of the game sections, and the situation of the game that is advantageous to the player, such as when the state related to the AT is “at-AT state” It is a game section that is easy to set at. In the case of Yes in step 3402, in step 3404, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 (which is a decrement counter and 1500 which is the maximum number of games that can stay in the “favorable section” is the initial value. 1 is subtracted from the counter value which is set as a value and can be subtracted every game during the period of “advantageous section”.

  Next, in step 3408, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state relating to the AT is the “AT in-progress state”. In the case of Yes in step 3408, in step 3410, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M decrements the AT counter value by 1, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1700). Note that if the answer is No in step 3402 or step 3408, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1700). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the AT-related state that can be displayed by the push order navigation is the “AT state”, the game AT counter value is subtracted, but the “advantageous BB state”, “ In the case of “advantageous BB inside game”, “specialized sign state”, or “additional special state”, the AT counter value is not subtracted even if the game is executed. In other words, when the AT counter value remains (1 or more remain) and the state shifts from the “AT in-progress state” to the “specialized precursor state”, the AT counter value is maintained and the “AT in-progress state” is maintained. It is configured to be able to transition (transition) from “state” → “specialized sign state” → “addition special state”. Even if the state relating to AT is “AT state”, it is possible not to decrement the AT counter value by 1 when a winning number including a bonus combination is determined in the game. At this time, for example, the AT counter value stored in the RAM of the main control board M is not subtracted, but the remaining AT game number displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S is subtracted. You may control. For example, when the game is executed and the bonus is won when the AT counter value is “30” and the remaining AT remaining game number displayed on the effect display device S40 is “30”, the AT counter value is “30”. Or “30 + α”, which is a value obtained by adding the value “α” obtained by the AT addition lottery relating to the game, is displayed on the effect display device S40 when the start lever D50 is operated. “29” may be displayed as the number of remaining AT games, or “29 + α”, which is a value obtained by adding the value “α” obtained by the AT extra lottery (note that “α” obtained by the extra lottery is , In a specific game after the game (a game satisfying a predetermined condition at the start of the bonus game, during the bonus game, at the end of the bonus game, or after the bonus game ends) without notifying the game. And “α” may be notified.) Then, the number of AT remaining games displayed on the effect display device S40 is also subtracted by 1 for each game even in the “advantageous BB inside game”, and an effect (for example, a bonus confirmation screen) suggesting the bonus confirmation is output. The number of remaining AT games can be subtracted for each game. With this configuration, when a bonus is won in a state in which push order navigation such as “AT state” can be executed, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately grasping the bonus winning. In other words, after the winning number including the bonus combination is determined, a continuous effect over a plurality of games can be executed using the effect display device S40 or the like to inquire whether or not the bonus has been won, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. Note that the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 after the bonus game is ended is "30" or a value of "30" or more when notifying the result of adding and adding the result of the AT extra lottery. Can be controlled to display. If the game is executed and the bonus is won when the AT counter value is “1” and the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is “1”, the game is displayed on the effect display device S40. The display related to the number of remaining AT games is “0”, but while maintaining this state, a continuous effect over a plurality of games is performed to determine whether or not the bonus is won, and the AT counter value is “1”. The winning number (or winning / replay winning information, or the winning group number) where the game is executed when the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is “1” and the AT addition lottery can be executed. Is won and the AT addition lottery is not won, the number of AT games is “0” and the number of AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is “0”. Further, when the number of AT remaining games is small, the probability of executing a continuous effect may be set lower (including 0%) than when the number of AT remaining games is large.

  Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process according to the subroutine of Step 1700 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1702, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state transition enabling condition is satisfied in the game. Here, in the present embodiment, the RT state transition enable conditions are RAM clear execution (RWM initialization), replay stop display (in this example, replay 04 stop display), BB win / start・ It is configured to be satisfied at the end. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not to transition to the RT state and the RT state after the next game based on the satisfied RT transition enabling condition, and performs the next process (in step 1750). Process). Note that if the answer is No in Step 1702, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in Step 1750). In this embodiment, the RT state transition control process is executed after all reels are stopped. However, when transitioning to “RT1”, the transition timing may be shifted when the lever is turned on. The timing for transitioning to the RT state (stores the RT number in the RAM) can be determined as appropriate.

  Next, FIG. 26 is an RT state transition diagram in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, there are four RT states of “RT0” to “RT2” and “1 type BB-A, B, C”, and the RT state is satisfied by satisfying the conditions indicated by the arrows in the figure. Will be transferred. As a specific transition example of the RT state, when the RT state is “RT1”, the RWM initialization is executed, or when the replay 04 is stopped and displayed, the state transitions to “RT0”. The replay 04 is a stop display, specifically, when the left stop button is operated as the first stop when the “replay-D1” is won in the situation where the RT state is “RT1”. The replays 01 to 03 are stopped and displayed, and “RT1” is maintained as the RT state. On the other hand, if “Re-Game-D1” is won in the situation where the RT state is “RT 1”, if the middle stop button or the right stop button is operated as the first stop, the re-play 04 is stopped and displayed. The RT state shifts from “RT1” to “RT0”.

  In addition, when the RT state is “RT0” or “RT1”, if the BB role is won and the BB role is not won in the winning game (the condition device relating to Type 1 BB-A to C operates) The RT state shifts to “RT2”. In addition, when the BB combination is won at “RT2” (1 type BB-A to C are activated), the process shifts to “1 type BB-A, B, C”. Further, when “BB is finished at“ 1 type BB-A, B, C ”” (the operation of 1 type BB-A to C is finished), the process shifts to “RT1”. If the state related to the AT is “low probability state”, the BB is won, and when the BB is ended, the RT state shifts to “RT1” which is highly profitable for the player. The state is a state in which no push order navigation occurs, so when “Replay-D1 to D3” is won, the wrong answer push order (the first stop is three choices: left button, middle button, right button, 1 of 3 choices is correct push order and replays other than replay 04 are stopped and 2 of 3 choices are incorrect push order and replay 04 is stopped)) By stopping, the replay 04 is stopped and displayed, and “RT1” is shifted to “RT0”. In addition, when the state related to AT is “high probability state”, “AT in-progress state”, “specialization precursor state” or “additional specialization state”, BB is won, and when BB ends, RT state Will shift to “RT1”, which is highly profitable for the player, and the state related to the AT is a state where push navigation occurs, and even when “Regame-D1 to D3” is won, Since it navigates the order of pushing correct answers that are not stopped, “RT1” can be maintained.

  Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the AT state start control process according to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT state transition enabling condition is satisfied in the game. The AT state transition enabling condition is, for example, a condition that is satisfied when the BB selected in the “high probability state” ends and the next game shifts to the “AT state” (see FIG. 28). . In the case of Yes in step 1752, in step 1760, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is triggered by the fact that it has newly shifted to the “AT precursor state” (in this example, the number of AT initial games is 50, “ The number of games for which subtraction is started after shifting to the “state” is set in the AT counter M60, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3500). Even in the case of No in step 1752, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 3500). In addition, after winning the BB in the “high probability state” and moving to “advantageous BB inside game”, the BB is awarded to shift to the “advantageous BB state”, and in the “advantageous BB state”, the AT game When the number is added, the initial value set in the AT counter exceeds 50 when the BB ends and shifts from the “advantageous BB state” to the “AT state”. Specifically, when the number of AT games is increased by 30 games in the “advantageous BB state” and then shifts to the “AT state”, 80 (initial value 50 + additional 30) is set in the AT counter. become. At this time, if an effect is given to notify the player that 30 games have been added in the “advantageous BB state”, at the start of the “AT state”, the player is informed that the number of AT initial games is 80 games. It is desirable to notify, but as another notification method, the initial value is set at the start of the “AT state” without performing the effect of notifying the player that 30 games have been added in the “advantageous BB state”. After presenting a certain 50 games to the player, the player is notified that 30 games have been added during the AT (for example, immediately after the start of the “AT state” or the state where the number of AT remaining games in the effect display device S40 is small). A notification method for performing a notification effect is also conceivable. By doing so, the player cannot clearly know how many games have been added or how many games have been added in the “advantageous BB state”. It is possible to enhance the interest in the extra effect that suddenly occurs for unknown reasons during AT (a state in which push order navigation can occur).

  Next, FIG. 28 is an AT state transition diagram in the present embodiment. In this embodiment, “low probability state”, “normal BB internal game”, “normal BB state”, “high probability state”, “AT state”, “specialized precursor state”, “addition special state” ”,“ Advantageous BB inside game ”, and“ Advantageous BB state ”, there are nine AT-related states, and by satisfying the conditions indicated by the arrows in the figure, the state related to AT shifts. For example, if the watermelon B is won in the “AT state” and the special state transition lottery in which the player wins 1/2 is won, the state shifts to the “specialized sign state”. In addition, when 10 games have elapsed (digested) since the transition to the “specialization sign state”, the transition is made to the “specialized state of addition”. In addition, as a game section, three states relating to ATs of “low probability state”, “normal BB internal game”, and “normal BB state” are set as “normal section”, “high probability state”, “AT in progress” The states related to the six ATs of “state”, “specialized sign state”, “addition special state”, “advantageous BB internal game”, and “advantageous BB state” are set as “advantageous sections”. In other words, even if the states related to the six ATs that are “advantageous sections” are transitioned (transitioned), if 1500 games have elapsed without being set as “normal sections”, the “advantageous sections” are forcibly terminated. Set to “Normal section”. Also, when the replay game 04 is stopped and displayed in the “AT state”, “specialized sign state”, or “additional special state”, which is a notification game state in which the push order navigation is displayed, However, the gaming state is maintained.

  It should be noted that the state related to the AT is not limited to that of the present embodiment. For example, the AT lottery is executed by winning a predetermined winning number in the “low probability state” or “high probability state”, and the AT lottery. May be configured to shift to the “predictor state” by winning and then to “AT state” after the lapse of 16 to 32 games. In such a configuration, the predetermined condition device may be If the AT lottery is executed by winning, and if the AT lottery is not won, the state shifts to the “gasse sign state”, and after 16 to 32 games, the state shifts to the “low probability state” or “high probability state” You may comprise. In addition, a “standby section” that is different from the “advantage section” and the “normal section” may be provided as a game section. For example, in the case of a game where AT lottery is executed by winning “Cherry”, BB If “BB + Cherry” with a duplicate of cherry and cherries is won, and the AT lottery is won, the state inside the BB until “BB” of “BB + Cherry” wins is set as “standby section”. May be. In this way, by providing a “standby section”, when the BB is won in the “low probability state” and the AT lottery is not won, the BB is won in the “low probability state”, and the AT In the period when the lottery is won and until the BB symbol combination is complete (until the advantageous section indicator lights up), the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off. Whether the player is present or not can be told to the player. Further, when the BB is elected in the “additional special state”, the “additional special state” may be resumed after the end of the BB. In such a case, during the BB, Execute the AT addition lottery that is different from the BB won in the “AT state” as the BB won in the “specialized state” (for example, win the AT extra lottery over the BB won in the “AT state”) The number of AT games may be increased and the number of games per game is relatively large). In addition, when the BB is elected in the “specialization sign state”, it may be configured to shift to the “additional special state” after the end of the BB. In such a configuration, during the BB, It may be configured such that the AT extra lottery is executed in the same manner as the BB won in the “extra specialization state”.

  Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process according to the subroutine of Step 3500 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in the present embodiment, there is a game section as a section related to the state of the game. As the game section, a “normal section” which is relatively low profit for the player and a relatively high section for the player. It has two game sections, an “advantageous section” which is a profitable section. As an explanation of the flowchart, first, in step 3508, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game section related to the game is a “normal section”. In the case of Yes in step 3508, in step 3510, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as the game section corresponding to the current AT state and the current game situation, and proceeds to step 3528. To do. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3508, in other words, when the game section is “advantageous section”, in step 3514, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M has the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 being zero. In other words, it is determined whether or not the “favorable section” has reached the maximum number of games that can be continued. In the case of Yes in step 3514, in step 3515, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears all information related to the AT (therefore, the AT counter value becomes 0 and the number of staying games in the “specialized sign state”). Things are also 0). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3514, in step 3518, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not any advantageous section end condition is satisfied. Here, the arbitrary advantageous section end condition is an “advantageous section” end condition other than when the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0. For example, the AT counter value is 0. Or when the push order navigation is executed a predetermined number of times. If No in step 3518, that is, if any advantageous section end condition is satisfied, the routine proceeds to step 3515. Thus, in the present embodiment, when the “advantageous section” ends and the “normal section” is set after the next game, information related to AT (number of AT continuing games, number of AT remaining games, etc.) All the information relating to (3) is cleared, so that the conditions for becoming an “advantageous section” again in the subsequent “normal section” are not relaxed. Note that information related to the AT cleared by the processing in step 3515 (processing at the end of the advantageous section) includes a counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1, a flag indicating a gaming state, and the like. The information is also cleared by clearing the RAM when the setting is changed. However, depending on the clearing of the RAM when the setting is changed, the “condition device related to the continuous accessory actuating device (BB)” or the “RT state” is used. In addition, the information related to “number of stored items” is also cleared, but depending on the processing in step 3515 (processing at the end of the advantageous section), “condition device related to the continuous accessory operating device (BB)” or “RT state” , Information related to “stored number” is not cleared. As described above, the RAM clear range at the time of changing the setting is different from the clear range at the end of the “advantageous section” (for example, when the process of step 3515 is executed). In addition, you may comprise so that "condition apparatus which concerns on an accessory continuous action | operation apparatus (BB)" and "RT state" may be hold | maintained by RAM clear at the time of a setting change. The addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the “advantageous section” are continuous. In this way, by making the addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the “advantageous section” continuous, it is possible to clear by a simple process of designating the top address to be cleared in the clear process and the range of addresses to be cleared. When the “advantageous section” ends, a command indicating that the “advantageous section” has ended is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub-control board S. However, even if the sub-control board S side receives the command, it is configured not to erase the game history such as information indicating that the game was “advantageous section” and how many games “AT state” was executed. ing. However, when the RAM clear at the time of setting change is executed, game history such as information on the “advantageous section” on the side of the sub-control board S and information on how many games “AT state” is executed Will also be deleted.

  When the “favorable section” is ended because the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is 0, (1) when the current AT state is the “high probability state”. If the state related to the AT is “low probability state” in the next game, and (2) the state related to the current AT is “advantageous BB inside game”, the state related to the AT in the next game is “ (3) If the current AT state is “Advantageous BB state”, the AT state will be “Normal BB state” in the next game. (4) Current If the state related to the AT is “AT in progress state”, “specialization precursor state” or “additional special state”, the state related to the AT is set to “low probability state” in the next game. (Information related to AT is clear. Order).

  Next, in step 3516, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the game section after the next game as the “normal section”. Next, in step 3517, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the advantageous section indicator YH because the “favorable section” has ended, and proceeds to step 3528. The advantageous section indicator YH is turned off when the “advantageous section” ends and is set to the “normal section”, but the detailed timing of turning off is not limited to the timing of this embodiment. For example, the advantageous section indicator YH may be turned off when a game medal related to a game that becomes the “normal section” after the “advantage section” ends. In other words, the advantageous section indicator YH may be configured to be turned off before the start lever D50 capable of starting the next game is operated. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 3518, in step 3520, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as an “advantageous section”, and proceeds to step 3528.

  Next, in step 3528, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M has decided to newly set the “advantageous section” in the next game (decided to set the “advantageous section” from the “normal section”). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3528, in step 3530, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1. The predetermined value to be set in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is a fixed numerical value (1500 in this example) that is common to all setting values. Next, in step 3534, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the advantageous section indicator YH and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1293). In addition, also in the case of No in step 3528, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1293). In this embodiment, the lighting process of the advantageous section indicator YH is executed at the timing of step 3534. However, the lighting timing of the advantageous section indicator YH is not limited to this, and the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on. Timing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in the present embodiment. The processing of the subroutine is started when a timer interrupt is started in the processing of Step 1040 or Step 1104, and thereafter, a predetermined time (in this example, T is set, but for example, a time of about 2 ms is set. To be periodically executed.

  First, in step 1602, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes processing at the start of interruption (for example, saving of data held in a register in the CPUC100, input port check of a power-off detection signal, etc.). Next, in step 1604, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the power-off is currently detected (in the current interrupt process). In the case of No in step 1604, in step 1900, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a power-off process described later. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1604, in step 1606, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (update processing of various timers managed by software). Next, in step 1608, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updates the storage area of each input port data in the RAM area). Here, the input port data includes the settlement button D60, the start lever D50, the stop button D40, the door switch D80, the setting key switch M20, the setting / reset button M30, the power-off detection signal, the input acceptance sensor D10s, and the first input sensor. D20s, the second input sensor D30s, the first payout sensor H10s, the second payout sensor H20s, etc. (that is, the presence / absence of the operation of these operation members and the sensor detection state are sampled at the interrupt interval T). )

  Next, in step 1610, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area and turns on / off the door switch flag and the setting key switch flag according to the sampling result of each input port data. (For example, when the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously ON over a plurality of samplings, the front door DU is opened without being affected by noise by turning on the door switch flag. Can also be detected). Next, in step 1611, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the spinning drive control process (process related to the drive control of the reel M50) for all the reels (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53). . Next, in step 1612, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60 and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. If YES in step 1612, in step 1613, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays the AT remaining game number (AT game number) on the AT counter value display device D 280, and proceeds to step 1614. Note that if the answer is No in Step 1612, the process proceeds to Step 1614. If the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, the processing in step 1612 and step 1613 is not necessary. Next, in step 1614, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs the output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, the blocker D100, and the like. Next, in step 1616, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off all error flags (not shown, inserted medal backflow error flag, inserted number error flag, inserted medal retention error flag, inserted abnormality error flag, It is determined whether all flags relating to errors such as a payout abnormality error flag, a payout medal retention error flag, a door switch flag, and the like are off. In the case of Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an error non-detection command (a command to the sub side and a command indicating that no error is detected) (for example, register Set in the area), and the process proceeds to Step 1622. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an error detection command (a command to the sub side and a command that an error is detected) (for example, Set in the register area), and the process proceeds to Step 1622. In step 1620, information related to an error (currently occurring error) corresponding to the error flag that is turned on is transmitted to the sub-side. The error not detected command may be set only when the error is released from the state where the error has occurred (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off). The information setting process may not be executed (the step 1618 may not be provided). Further, the error detection command may execute the set process only when an error occurs from a state where no error has occurred, or from the state where a first error (for example, a inserted medal retention error) has occurred. The set process may be executed when the type of error has changed, such as a second error (for example, a payout medal retention error).

  Next, in step 1622, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (sub-side command) (for example, if it is set in the register area in step 1618 or step 1620, it is set). Control command). Here, as a command to be transmitted to the sub control board S, a command related to the start lever operation timing (transmitted immediately after the start lever operation), a command related to the first reel stop reception timing (the stop button was operated as the first stop) A command related to the second reel stop reception timing (transmitted immediately after operating the stop button as the second stop), a command related to the third reel stop reception timing (the stop button as the third stop) (Sent immediately after operation), transmitted immediately after all reels stop), commands related to the production group number (sent immediately after operation of the start lever D50), commands related to winning / replay winning information ( Sent immediately after the start lever operation (limited to the advantageous section)) Sent immediately after the lever operation), a command related to the RT state (sent between the time when all reels stop and the next game starts), a command related to the state related to AT (all reels stop) Sent until the next game is started), commands related to the number of AT remaining games (from the time all reels stop until the next game starts, or immediately after the start lever operation Forward press command (sent immediately after start lever operation), forward press avoid command (sent immediately after start lever operation), reverse press command (sent immediately after start lever operation) , Reverse push avoid command (sent immediately after start lever operation), etc. Next, in step 1624, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the revolving game machine P to an external hall computer or the like). Although not shown, information relating to an error output by the external signal includes a door opening error, a closing abnormality error, a dispensing abnormality error, a closing reception sensor retention error, and the like. The door opening error is configured to be an error when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on. Is configured to cause an error. Next, in step 1626, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the output data of the LEDs (7-segment LED lamp, etc.) (for example, a predetermined 7-segment LED unit among a plurality of 7-segment LED units). Output a predetermined segment of the segment) (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 1628, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the LED lighting mode (for example, changing the LED lighting color). Note that step 1628 may not be executed. Next, in step 1630, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a soft random number management process (such as a process for updating a random value managed by software). Next, in step 1632, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M obtains internal information register data (the internal information register has a region where an abnormality flag bit is set when an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit). . Next, in step 1634, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether or not an abnormal flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is set). More specifically, the abnormality flag bit is set when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value. In the case of Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the update state of the built-in random number is normal (whether or not an abnormal flag bit indicating the update state abnormality is set). Determine. In the case of Yes in step 1636, in step 1638, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an interrupt end process and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1602). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1634 or step 1636, in step 1640, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a built-in random number error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the above-described non-recoverable error processing.

  Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the power-off process according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. First, in step 1902, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M stores the stack pointer. Next, in step 1904, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the power-off process completed flag (for example, updates the power-off process completed flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 1906, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M calculates a checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area, and information for error detection based on the calculated checksum (for example, the calculation) In the checksum area, the lower 1 byte in the checksum or the complement thereof) is set. Next, in step 1912, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM, and proceeds to step 1914. Next, in step 1914, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process for waiting for reset.

  Next, FIG. 32 shows an example of an image diagram of the push order display of the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present example. The table in the figure shows the reel stop order and the instruction number indicated by the push order navigation to be executed (information relating to the push order. In this example, the main control board M is determined and transmitted to the sub control board S). It is a table | surface which shows a response | compatibility. For example, the instruction number when informing “middle → right → left” as the pressing order indicates “A5”. Next, on the left side of the figure, when the push order is “left → middle → right” (the corresponding instruction number is “A1”), the push order display device D270, the advantageous section display device YH, and the effect display device S40. An image displayed on the screen is illustrated. Here, the push order display device D270 of this example is a 7-segment display method and also serves as a payout number display device. When the medals are paid out, the number of medals paid out is displayed as a two-digit number on the push order display device D270. Here, even when the push order navigation is executed, if the display of the push order display device D270 is displayed as a two-digit numerical value, whether the display on the push order display device D270 indicates the number of medals to be paid out or not. It becomes difficult to determine whether the navigation display is displayed. For this reason, the push order display device D270 displays “=” in the left digit as “= 1” so that it can be distinguished whether the number of medals has been paid out or the push order navigation display. By configuring, when the display of the push order display device D270 is a two-digit numerical value, it is a display of the number of medals to be paid out. As the display of the push order display device D270, the left side is “=” and the right side is a number. If there is, it is configured so that it can be determined that the display is a push order navigation, and it is configured to prevent misidentification of the player. Further, in the advantageous section indicator YH provided at the lower right of the push order display device D270, a lamp indicating that the current game section is the “favorable section” is lit. At the same time, a display of “40 remaining games” indicating the number of remaining games in the “advantageous section” (or “AT state”) is displayed on the effect display device S40. Also, the right side of the figure shows an image displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 when the push order is “middle → left → right” (the corresponding instruction number is “A3”). Yes. In addition, since the current game section is an “advantageous section”, the advantageous section indicator YH is lit, and a display of “25 remaining games” indicating the number of remaining games in the “advantageous section” is displayed on the effect display device S40. Is displayed. It should be noted that a combination with a push order (a condition device with a medal payout out of condition devices whose stop display is different depending on the reel stop order, for example, a bell) and a re-playing combination with a push order (depending on the reel stop order) The condition display of the instruction number of the condition device having a different combination of the stopped display may be different, and the display method of the push order display device D270 is limited to 7 segments. For example, an instruction may be made by turning on a plurality of LEDs according to a lighting pattern corresponding to an instruction number using an LED display. In addition, it is good also as a structure provided with the advantageous area display YH in the lower right part of the credit amount display apparatus D200. In this case, the timing for turning on the advantageous section indicator YH is preferably until the operation of the settlement button D60 becomes effective. When the player quits the game, he / she checks the credit number display device D200 to check whether there are any medals remaining. If there are medals remaining, the settlement button D60 is operated. That is, it is a user-friendly gaming machine that can be prevented from accidentally quitting a game even though it is an “advantageous section” from the next game by lighting until the settlement button D60 is activated. be able to.

  In addition, the notification mode of the game section in the advantageous section display YH is not limited to this example, and the same section display as the advantageous section display YH is provided on the lower right of both of the two seven segments (the section display is provided with the section display). It is also possible to have a configuration with two). In such a configuration, when the left section indicator lights up, the fact that the current game section is “normal section” is notified, while the right section When the section indicator lights up, it may be configured to notify that the current game section is an “advantageous section”. Furthermore, “normal section” and “advantageous section” are distinguished by the color and lighting mode when the section indicator is lit (for example, “green” in “normal section” and “red” in “advantageous section”). Or “lighting in the“ normal section ”and“ flashing ”in the“ favorable section ””). Furthermore, the display mode of the section indicator is changed according to “in-AT BB internal game”, “AT-in-BB state”, “AT precursor state”, “AT-in-state”, etc. in the “advantageous section”. May be. Furthermore, it may be configured to recognize that the current game section is the “standby section” separately from the “normal section” and the “favorable section”. However, the distinction between “normal section” and “advantageous section” is made easy to distinguish, for example, by using different section indicators, and the player recognizes whether the current game section is “advantageous section” or not. It is preferable to make it easy to do.

  Further, regarding the display on the effect display device S40 indicating the number of remaining games in the “advantageous section”, for example, in the “AT precursor state” or “AT in preparation”, the remaining number of games in the “advantageous section” is not displayed. A configuration may be adopted (a disadvantage to the player that the remaining number of games in the “advantageous section” is subtracted in a relatively low profit state for the player is not notified). However, even in the case of such a configuration, it is preferable that the section indicator is lit to notify the player that the “advantageous section” is in progress. At the same time, it is preferable that the section indicator is configured to be controlled by the main control board M side, and that the section indicator is installed at a position where the display is easily visible to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 33 to 44, the control process executed on the sub-control board S side will be described.

<Sub program start processing>
First, FIG. 33 is a subroutine showing sub-side program start processing. This sub-side program start process is called and executed when the power is turned on.

  First, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub control board S prohibits interruption. Next, in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes various initialization processes such as initialization of the CPU and RAM and calculation of checksum.

  Next, in step 2008, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the checksum value calculated when the power is turned on matches the checksum value calculated and stored when the power is turned off. In the case of Yes in step 2008, in other words, in the determination process of step 2008, if it is determined that both checksum values match, in step 2010, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes one-command processing described later. It is determined whether or not it is a state that has returned from a state in which a power interruption has occurred, that is, whether or not it has completely recovered.

  In the case of Yes in step 2010, in other words, if it is determined that the recovery is complete, in step 2012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S permits an interrupt and is executed when a power interruption occurs. Return processing to one command processing.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2008, in other words, if it is determined in the above-described determination processing in step 2008 that both checksum values do not match, in step 2014, the CPUSC of the sub control board S clears the RAM. Execute. It should be noted that after the processing of step 2014 is executed or when No in step 2010, the processing is shifted to the sub main loop processing.

<Sub-main loop processing>
Next, FIG. 34 is a subroutine showing sub-main loop processing. The sub-main loop process is called and executed after the sub-side program start process shown in FIG. 33 is executed.

  First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S clears the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub control board S permits interruption. Next, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes command reception processing. This command reception process is a process of receiving various commands transmitted from the main control board M.

  Next, in step 2250, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes one command processing which will be described later. This one-command process is a process executed based on a control command from the main control means 100. Specific processing will be described later. In step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a predetermined time, for example, 16 ms has elapsed. If it is determined that it has not elapsed, the process returns to step 2250. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process returns to step 2102. Note that the predetermined time is not limited to 16 ms, and can be appropriately changed according to the processing.

<Sub-side power-off processing>
Next, FIG. 35 is a subroutine showing sub-side power-off processing executed on the sub-control board S side. The sub-side power-off process is a process started when the sub-control board S detects a power-off.

  First, in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the watchdog timer. In step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub-side program start process is being executed. If YES in step 2204, the process proceeds to step 2210. On the other hand, if No in step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calculates a checksum in step 2206. Next, in step 2208, the CPUSC of the sub control board S saves various data (checksum calculation result, address of the program being executed, etc.), and proceeds to step 2210.

  Next, in step 2210, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether 500 ms has elapsed. Here, when it is determined that 500 ms has elapsed, the power-off process is terminated. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2210, in step 2212, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the power supply has been restored. In the case of Yes in step 2212, in step 2214, the CPUSC of the sub control board S updates the number of instantaneous interruption occurrences. Next, in step 2216, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer, and returns to the processing that was being executed when the power was turned off. If it is determined in step 2212 that the power has not been restored, the process returns to step 2210 described above.

<1 command processing>
Next, FIG. 36 is a subroutine showing one command processing called and executed in the processing of step 2250 in FIG.

  Next, in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether it is the start lever operation timing. In the case of Yes in step 2300, in other words, when it is determined that it is the operation timing of the start lever, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the start lever operation processing described later to execute the next processing (step 2110).

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2252, in other words, if it is not the operation timing of the start lever, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2254 whether or not it is the first reel stop acceptance timing. In the case of No in step 2254, in other words, if it is the first reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2500, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the first cylinder stop acceptance processing described later. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2254, in other words, if it is not the first reel stop reception timing, in step 2258, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is the second reel stop reception timing. . In the case of No in step 2258, in other words, if it is the second reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2550, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the second cylinder stop acceptance processing described later. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2258, in other words, if it is not the second reel stop reception timing, in step 2262, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is the third reel stop reception timing. . In the case of No in step 2262, in other words, in the case of the third reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calls and executes a subroutine for the third cylinder stop acceptance processing described later. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2262, in other words, if it is not the third reel stop reception timing, in step 2266, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is the stop timing of the stop display symbol. . In the case of YES at step 2266, in other words, when it is the stop timing of the stop display symbol, at step 2268, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes stop display symbol time processing (not shown), and The process proceeds to the process (the process of step 2110). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2266, in other words, if it is not the stop timing of the stop display symbol, the CPUSC of the sub control board S immediately shifts to the next process (process of step 2110).

<Processing at start lever operation>
Next, FIG. 37 is a subroutine showing a start lever operation process that is called and executed in the process of step 2300 of FIG.

  Next, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT is an in-AT state. In the case of Yes in step 2302, in other words, if the state relating to the AT is the in-AT state, in step 2350, the CPUSC of the sub control board S reads and executes the in-AT processing at the time of start lever operation described later. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2302, in other words, if the state related to the AT is not the in-AT state, in step 2304, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT is a specialized precursor state. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2304, in other words, if the state related to the AT is a special sign state, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub control board S reads a special sign process at the time of start lever operation described later. And execute the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2304, in other words, if the state relating to AT is not the “specialization precursor state”, in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the state relating to AT is “additional special state”. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2306, in other words, when the state relating to the AT is “additional special state”, in step 2450, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs an additional specialization process at the time of start lever operation described later. Read and execute, and shift to the next process (process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2306, in other words, if the state relating to AT is not the “addition specialization state”, in step 2307, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the state relating to AT is “inside advantageous BB. It is determined whether or not it is “game”. In the case of Yes in step 2307, in other words, if the state relating to AT is “advantageous BB internal game”, in step 2700, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the advantageous BB internal internal processing subroutine when the start lever is operated. Is called and executed to shift to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  In the case of No in step 2307, in other words, if the state relating to AT is not “advantageous BB internal game”, in step 2308, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the RT state is “RT1”. Determine. In the case of Yes in step 2308, in other words, if the RT state is “RT1”, in step 2310, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S does not have the push order navigation (the push order navigation is not in the state related to AT). It is a state relating to an AT that does not occur and is determined to be “low probability state”, “normal BB internal game”, “normal BB state”, or the like. In the case of Yes in step 2310, in other words, if the state relating to AT is no push order navigation, in step 2312, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. As described above, when the sub-control board S side receives the reverse push instruction command, the reverse push avoid command, the forward push instruction command, and the forward push avoid command, it is not a configuration that can execute an effect related to push order navigation. When the AT extra lottery is won, the main control board M side sends a command related to the AT extra lottery and the number of AT extra games to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side receives the command Moreover, you may comprise so that the execution timing and effect aspect regarding the production | presentation regarding push order navigation may be determined by the sub control board | substrate S side.

  In the case of Yes in step 2312, in other words, when an avoidance command is received, in step 2314, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays an image to avoid establishment as a push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode group. Is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). As described above, in this embodiment, when the number of games has elapsed from the situation of “RT1” and “AT state” and the AT counter value becomes 0, the state has shifted to “RT1” and “low probability state”. In this case (before replay 04 is stopped and displayed), if the reverse-pressed white 7-match replay or the forward-pressed black 7-match replay is won, the extra number of AT games does not occur. It is configured so that the push order that is not in a straight line is navigated. In addition, when the number of games elapses from the situation of “RT1” and “AT state” and the AT counter value becomes 0, the state changes to “RT1” and “low probability state”. The push order bell may generate push order navigation, but the push order replay may be configured not to generate push order navigation.

  If the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is No in Step 2308, if No in Step 2310, if No in Step 2312, the CPUSC displays the effect image and the background image in Step 2316 based on the state related to AT. (Step 2110).

<Processing during AT at start lever operation>
Next, FIG. 38 is a subroutine showing a process during AT during start lever operation which is called and executed in the process of step 2350 of FIG.

  Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information related to the condition device relating to the game in step 2352, confirms the winning / replaying winning information related to the game in step 2354, and in step 2356, indicates the instruction number. Check the commands related to. In this way, in a state related to AT in which push order navigation can be executed such as “AT in progress”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, When transmitting an effect group number in an AT-related state where “push order navigation” such as “probability state” is not executed (also applicable when the game section is “normal section”), the command related to the instruction number is not transmitted. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the production group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, it may be configured such that the push order bell (or push order replay) is won and the correct answer push order can be grasped. For example, the push order navigation display at the time of push order bell execution and the push order navigation display of push order replay are the same display mode group (for example, the push order is notified by numbers and the display colors related to the numbers are the same) It can be applied to the case where it is configured so as to be displayed in (). Moreover, when comprised in that way, it is comprised so that the display image (for example, character image) different from a push order navigation display may be displayed at the time of execution of a push order navigation in the production | presentation display apparatus S40, You may comprise so that the image for production | generation different at the time of the push order navigation which concerns may be displayed, and the push order navigation which concerns on a push order replay may be displayed.

  Next, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the game condition device is a push order bell. Here, the push order bell is any one of the above-described winning-A1 to winning-A6.

  In the case of Yes in step 2358, in other words, in the case where the condition device of the game is the push order bell, in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects six push order bells as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order of the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when winning the winning order winning prize-A1, the number indicating the pushing order corresponding to “left → middle → right” which is the pushing order capable of obtaining the maximum payout number is enclosed in a circle. Display in display mode.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2358, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a push order bell, in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the condition device of the game is a push order replay. It is determined whether or not. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-game-A and re-game-D1-D3.

  In the case of Yes in step 2362, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2364, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order navigation as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct push order among the three choice push orders is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, since the push order is three choices, the first stop button is information corresponding to any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41, only the numeral 1 is displayed as the push order navigation display.

  In the case of No in step 2362, in other words, in the case where the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. . In the case of Yes in step 2366, in other words, when an avoidance command is received, in step 2368, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as the push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode. Displayed on the effect display device S40 in groups.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the above-described processing of step 2360, 2364, or 2368, and then displays the AT background image on the effect display device S40 in step 2370.

  Next, in step 2372, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of AT remaining games is 10 games or less. In the case of Yes in step 2372, in other words, if the number of remaining AT games is 10 or less, in step S2374, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the number of remaining AT games in display mode B (display mode described later). A display mode that is less conspicuous than A) is displayed on the effect display device S40.

  Next, in step 2376, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a forward press instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2376, in other words, when a forward press instruction command is received, in step 2378, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the first image to avoid establishment as the push order navigation display. It displays on effect display apparatus S40 by a number display mode group.

  If No in step 2376 or if the processing in step 2378 has been executed, in step 2380, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a reverse push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2380, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2382, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the first image to avoid establishment as a push order navigation display. It displays on effect display apparatus S40 by a number display mode group.

  The CPUSC of the sub control board S shifts to the next process (the process of step 2110) when the result of step 2380 is No or when the process of step 2382 is executed.

  In the case of No in step 2372, in other words, if the number of AT remaining games is 11 games or more, in step S2384, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the AT remaining game number in the display mode A (the display mode described above). (Display mode that is more conspicuous than B) is displayed on the effect display device S40.

  Next, in step 2386, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a forward press instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2386, in other words, when a forward press instruction command is received, in step 2388, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to “left → middle → right” as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order to be displayed is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  If No in step 2386, or if the processing in step 2388 has been executed, in step 2390, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a reverse push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2390, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2392, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to “right → middle → left” as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order to be displayed is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  The CPUSC of the sub control board S shifts to the next process (the process of step 2110) when the result of step 2390 is No or when the process of step 2392 is executed. As described above, when the AT remaining game number is small, in other words, when the display of the AT remaining game number is displayed in the display mode B that is more conspicuous than the display mode A, the forward press instruction command or the reverse Even if a push instruction command is received, an effect that displays “Aim 7!” Together with the image of the arrow is not executed, and the middle reel in the push order in which the white seven and the black seven do not stop display on the invalid line is displayed as the first stop reel. It is configured to execute push order navigation. With this configuration, when the number of AT remaining games is displayed in the display mode B, which is a display mode for informing the player that the number of AT remaining games is small in a situation where the number of AT remaining games is small. Can be configured so that the visibility of the display of the number of remaining AT games in the display mode B is not hindered by the image of the arrow or the display of “Aim at 7!”. Similarly, a continuous effect (for example, whether or not the “AT state” (a state related to an AT in which push order navigation can be performed) continues in a situation where the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is small (for example, Even if it is configured to execute (battle effect), it is configured so that the visibility of the battle effect is not hindered by configuring so that an arrow image or “Aim 7” is not displayed during the execution of the battle effect. be able to. In addition, with this configuration, even when the number of AT remaining games in the effect display device S40 is 0 and a message indicating that the “AT state” is ended after defeating the battle effect is displayed, When a forward push instruction command or reverse push instruction command is received, the forward push instruction command or reverse push is performed at the operation timing of the bet button D220 after the message indicating that the “AT state is completed” is displayed. Informs the number of AT extra games based on the instruction command (based on winning of forward black 7 replay or reverse white 7 replay). However, it can be configured to notify that the number of AT games has been added at a later timing, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

<Special indication processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 39 is a subroutine showing the start lever operation special indication process which is called and executed in the process of step 2400 of FIG.

  Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information related to the condition device related to the game in Step 2402, confirms the winning / replaying winning information related to the game in Step 2404, and in Step 2406, indicates the instruction number. Check the commands related to. In this way, in a state related to AT in which push order navigation can be executed such as “AT in progress”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, When transmitting an effect group number in an AT-related state where “push order navigation” such as “probability state” is not executed (also applicable when the game section is “normal section”), the command related to the instruction number is not transmitted. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the production group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, it may be configured such that the push order bell (or push order replay) is won and the correct answer push order can be grasped.

  Next, in step 2408, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the game condition device is a push order bell. Here, the push order bell is any one of the above-described winning-A1 to winning-A6.

  In the case of Yes in step 2408, in other words, in the case where the condition device of the game is the push order bell, in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects six push order bells as the push order navigation display. An image that suggests the correct pressing order in the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second number display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when winning the winning order winning prize -A2, the number indicating the pushing order corresponding to "Left → Right → Medium", which is the pushing order capable of obtaining the maximum payout number, is surrounded by an asterisk. Display in display mode. The first numeric display mode group and the second numeric display mode group described above may display numerical values suggesting the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first numeric display mode group includes a numeric value. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red, and so on.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2408, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a push order bell, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the condition device of the game is a push order replay in step 2412. It is determined whether or not. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-game-A and re-game-D1-D3.

  In the case of Yes in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order replay as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct push order among the three choice push orders is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, since the push order is three choices, the first stop button is information corresponding to any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct answer pressing order, the number “1” is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. Is displayed, the number “1” is displayed at the center lower side of the effect display device S40. When the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the center of the effect display device S40 is located at the lower right side. The number “1” is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, push order information is displayed at a position near the stop button D40 corresponding to the reel to be stopped in the effect display device S40.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2412, in other words, in the case where the condition device of the game is not the push order replay, in step 2416, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub control board S has received the forward push instruction command. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2416, in other words, when a forward press instruction command is received, in step 2418, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to “left → middle → right” as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2416, in other words, in the case where the forward press instruction command has not been received, in step 2420, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the reverse press instruction command has been received. to decide. In the case of Yes in step 2420, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2422, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to “right → middle → left” as the push order navigation display. An image indicating the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2420, in other words, in the case where a reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2424, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. . In the case of Yes in Step 2424, in other words, when an avoidance command is received, in Step 2426, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as the push order navigation display in the second numerical display mode. Displayed on the effect display device S40 in groups.

  Next, when the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the processing of steps 2410, 2414, 2418, 2422, and 2426, or in the case of No in step 2424, an effect display of the AT background image is performed in step 2428. In step S2430, the number of AT remaining games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2110).

<Specialization process for starting lever operation>
Next, FIG. 40 is a subroutine showing the specialization process for adding the start lever when called and executed in the process of step 2450 in FIG.

  Next, in step 2452, the CPUSC of the sub control board S reads information related to the condition device relating to the game, and in step 2454 confirms winning / replay winning information relating to the game. Check the commands related to. In this way, in a state related to AT in which push order navigation can be executed such as “AT in progress”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, When transmitting an effect group number in an AT-related state where “push order navigation” such as “probability state” is not executed (also applicable when the game section is “normal section”), the command related to the instruction number is not transmitted. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the production group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, it may be configured such that the push order bell (or push order replay) is won and the correct answer push order can be grasped.

  Next, in step 2458, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the game condition device is a push order bell or a common bell. Here, the push order bell is any one of the above-described winning-A1 to winning-A6.

  In the case of Yes in step 2458, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, in step 2460, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the six selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when winning the winning order winning prize -A4, a number indicating the pushing order corresponding to “right → left → middle”, which is the pushing order capable of obtaining the maximum payout number, is enclosed in stars. The display mode is displayed. The first numeric display mode group and the second numeric display mode group described above may display numerical values suggesting the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first numeric display mode group includes a numeric value. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red, and so on.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2458 described above, in other words, in the case where the game condition device is neither a push order bell nor a common bell, in step 2462, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the game condition. The device determines whether it is a push order replay. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-game-A and re-game-D1-D3.

  In the case of Yes in step 2462, in other words, in the case where the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2464, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order navigation as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct push order among the three choice push orders is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, since the selection order is three choices, the first stop button corresponds to any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct answer pressing order, the number “1” is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. Is displayed, the number “1” is displayed at the center lower side of the effect display device S40. When the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the center of the effect display device S40 is located at the lower right side. The number “1” is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, push order information is displayed at a position close to the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2462 described above, in other words, in the case where the game condition device is not a push order replay game, in step 2466, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has received a forward push instruction command. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2466, in other words, if a forward press instruction command is received, in step 2468, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to “left → middle → right” as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image. That is, since the push order is the forward push, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 in order, from left to right. The order of pressing can be suggested by the image of the arrow pointing to.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2466 described above, in other words, in the case where the forward press instruction command has not been received, in step 2470, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub control board S has received the reverse press instruction command. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2470, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2472, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to “right → middle → left” as the reverse push navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image. That is, since the pressing order is reverse pressing, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are the right stop button D43, the middle stop button D42, and the left stop button D41 in order, from right to left. The order of pressing can be suggested by the image of the arrow pointing to.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2470 described above, in other words, in the case where a reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2474, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2474, in other words, when the avoidance command is received, in step 2476, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the image for avoiding establishment as the push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode. Displayed on the effect display device S40 in groups. Here, the avoidance command is a generic name for both the forward press avoidance command and the reverse press avoidance command. Therefore, the process of step 2476 is executed regardless of whether a forward press avoidance command is received or a reverse press avoidance command is received. For example, when a forward press avoidance command is received, in order to avoid forward press “left → middle → right”, the number “1” is displayed on the lower right side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first Information as if the one stop button is the right stop button D43 is displayed as a push order navigation display.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2474 described above, in other words, if the avoidance command has not been received, in step 2478, the CPUSC of the sub control board S does not display the push order navigation.

  Next, when the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the processing of the above-described steps 2460, 2464, 2468, 2472, 2476, or 2478, in step 2480, the AT background image is displayed on the effect display device S40. In step S2482, the number of AT remaining games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Advantageous processing inside the BB during start lever operation>
Next, FIG. 41 is a subroutine showing the specialization process for adding the start lever when called and executed in the process of step 2700 of FIG.

  Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information related to the condition device relating to the game in Step 2702, confirms the winning / replaying winning information relating to the game in Step 2704, and in Step 2706, indicates the instruction number. Check the commands related to. In this way, in a state related to AT in which push order navigation can be executed such as “AT in progress”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, When transmitting an effect group number in an AT-related state where “push order navigation” such as “probability state” is not executed (also applicable when the game section is “normal section”), the command related to the instruction number is not transmitted. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the production group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, it may be configured such that the push order bell (or push order replay) is won and the correct answer push order can be grasped.

  Next, in step 2708, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a predetermined game (5 games) has elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB inside game. In the case of Yes in step 2708, in other words, if the predetermined game (5 games) has not elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB inside game, in step 2710, the CPUSC of the sub control board S It is determined whether the condition device is a push order bell or a common bell. Here, the push order bell is any one of the above-described winning-A1 to winning-A6.

  In the case of Yes in step 2710, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, in step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the six selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when winning the winning order winning prize -A4, a number indicating the pushing order corresponding to “right → left → middle”, which is the pushing order capable of obtaining the maximum payout number, is enclosed in stars. The display mode is displayed. The first numeric display mode group and the second numeric display mode group described above may display numerical values suggesting the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first numeric display mode group includes a numeric value. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red, and so on.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2710 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is neither a push order bell nor a common bell, in step 2714, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the game condition. The device determines whether it is a push order replay. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-game-A and re-game-D1-D3.

  In the case of Yes in step 2714, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2716, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct push order among the three choice push orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numeric display mode group. Here, since the selection order is three choices, the first stop button corresponds to any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct answer pressing order, the number “1” is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. Is displayed, the number “1” is displayed at the center lower side of the effect display device S40. When the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the center of the effect display device S40 is located at the lower right side. The number “1” is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, push order information is displayed at a position close to the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2714 described above, in other words, in the case where the game condition device is not a push order replay, in step 2718, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has received a command relating to 7 replays. It is determined whether or not. Here, the forward press instruction command, the reverse press instruction command, the forward press avoid command, and the reverse press avoid command are collectively referred to as a 7 replay command. In the case of Yes in step 2718, in other words, when a command related to 7 replays is received, in step 2720, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as the push order navigation display with the first number. Displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode group.

  Next, if the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the above-described steps 2712, 2716, and 2720, or if No in step 2718, in step 2722, the AT background image is displayed on the effect display device S40. In step S2724, the number of remaining AT games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 2110).

  In the case of No in step 2708, in other words, when a predetermined game (5 games) has elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB inside game, in step 2726, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the effect display device S40. In this case, it is notified that BB has been won (in this process, the push order navigation is not displayed), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Processing at the time of first torso stop reception>
Next, FIG. 42 is a subroutine showing the first cylinder stop acceptance process that is called and executed in the process of step 2500 of FIG.

  Next, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub control board S operates the stop button based on the correct push order as the first stop. It is determined whether or not.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2504, in other words, when there is an operation of a stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in step 2506, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs the push order navigation display. The display related to the first stop is erased, and the next process (the process of step 2110) is entered.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2504, in other words, in the case where there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in step 2508, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs the forward pressing navigation or the reverse. It is determined whether or not the push order navigation related to the push navigation (push order navigation instructing to align the forward push black replay or the reverse push white 7 replay to the invalid line) is being displayed. In the case of Yes in step 2508, in step 2510, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S darkly displays the push order navigation (it continues to be darkly displayed in the game) and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). Transition.

  In the case of No in step 2508, in other words, if the push order navigation related to 7 replays is not being displayed, in step 2512, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases all the push order navigation displays and fails in the push order. The effect is executed and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Processing at the time of 2nd torso stop reception>
Next, FIG. 43 is a subroutine showing a second cylinder stop acceptance process that is called and executed in the process of step 2550 of FIG.

  Next, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2552, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a push order bell. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is the push order bell, in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the stop button based on the correct push order as the second stop. Determine whether there is an operation.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2556, in other words, when there is an operation of a stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the first in the pressing order navigation display. 2 The display relating to the stop is erased, and the next process (the process of step 2110) is entered.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2556, in other words, when there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct push order as the second stop, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays all the push order navigation displays. Erasing, pushing order failure effect is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2552, in other words, when the push order navigation is not being displayed, or in the case of No in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is not the push order bell, immediately Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Process at the time of 3rd torso stop reception>
Next, FIG. 44 is a subroutine showing a third cylinder stop acceptance process that is called and executed in the process of step 2600 of FIG.

  Next, in step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2604, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a push order bell. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2604, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is the push order bell, in step 2606, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the stop button based on the correct push order as the third stop. Determine whether there is an operation.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2606, in other words, when there is a stop button operation based on the correct pressing order as the third stop, in step 2608, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S produces the pressing order success effect. “GET!” Is displayed on the display device S40. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2606, in other words, when there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the third stop, in step 2610, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays “GET” "Is not displayed.

  In the case of No in step 2602 described above, in other words, when the push order navigation is not being displayed, in the case of No in step 2604, in other words, when the condition device related to the game is not the push order bell, or in steps 2608 or 2610 When the process is executed, in step 2612, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a command related to the number of AT added games (command set in step 1517) is received from the main side. As described above, the main control board M transmits a command indicating the number of remaining AT games to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S calculates a difference from the command indicating the number of remaining AT games received last time. It may be configured to determine whether or not the addition of the AT game number has been executed and the AT additional game number and display the AT additional game number.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2612, in other words, when a command related to the number of AT games is received from the main side, in step 2614, the CPUSC of the sub control board S uses the AT display game in the effect display device S 40. The number is displayed and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2612, in other words, if the command related to the number of AT games is not received from the main side, in step 2616, the CPUSC of the sub control board S adds AT on the effect display device S40. Without displaying the number of games, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). In addition, as a method for reporting the number of added games at AT, (1) all of the added games are notified by the game, (2) a part of the added games is notified by the game, and the remaining number of games is recorded after the game. (3) In the game, the number of additional games is not notified, and the games after the game (for example, at the time of winning 7 replays, at the time of winning the common bell (at the time of winning a role that is not added), After executing the game (continuous production), the operation of the bet button D220 and the operation of the start lever D50 for the game in which the number of remaining games on the production display device S40 becomes “0”, or the game after the game that has become “0” ).

  In addition, even if the common bell in the specialization state of addition is stopped in accordance with the push order navigation, the display regarding the number of AT additional games is not displayed (the common bell is not subjected to AT addition lottery).

  Next, FIG. 45 is an image execution execution image diagram 1 according to the present embodiment. First, the left side of the figure shows the daytime background on the effect display device S40 under the situation where the state relating to AT is “AT state”, and “Winning-A1” (push order bell) is selected as the condition device. The winning navigation display corresponding to “Left → Middle → Right” is displayed as a number (first number display mode group) in a circular figure. Further, in the center of the figure, the daytime background is displayed on the effect display device S40 under the situation where the state relating to AT is “specialized sign state”, and “winning-A1” (push order bell) as the condition device is displayed. Is selected, and a push order navigation display corresponding to “left → middle → right” is displayed as a number (second number display mode group) in a star-shaped figure. Also, the right side of the figure shows the night background on the effect display device S40 under the situation where the state relating to AT is “additional specialization state”, and “winning-A1” (push order bell) as the condition device. Is selected, and a push order navigation display corresponding to “left → middle → right” is displayed as a number (first number display mode group) in a circular figure. Thus, although the background effect is different between the case where the AT-related state is the “AT in-progress state” and the “addition-specific state”, the display mode group of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40. Are the same. Further, the background effect is the same in the case where the state relating to the AT is the “AT state” and the “specialized sign state”, but the display mode group of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 is different. ing. In the figure, the push order navigation of “left → middle → right” is illustrated as an example, but the same configuration is used when other push order navigations are displayed. In the present embodiment, the number of AT remaining games is not subtracted by the execution of the game between the “specialized sign state” and the “additional special state”.

  Next, FIG. 46 is an AT execution effect image diagram 2 according to the present embodiment. First, in the upper left of the figure, in the situation where the state related to AT is “AT in progress”, “Winning-A1” which is a push order bell is won, and the effect display device S40 displays the inside of the circular figure. A push order navigation display indicating that the stop button D40 is operated in the order of “left → middle → right” is displayed by the drawn numbers (first number display mode group), and at the same time, “left → “= 1”, which is a display corresponding to the pressing order of the “middle → right” stop button D40, is displayed. When the player operates the left stop button D41, which is a stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, a display prompting the operation of the middle stop button D42 is displayed as the second stop (of the effect display device S40). The display of “2” in the push order navigation display becomes larger). Next, when the middle stop button D42, which is a stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop, is operated, a display prompting the operation of the right stop button D43 is displayed as the third stop (the push of the effect display device S40). The display of “3” in the forward navigation display becomes larger). Next, when the right stop button D43 is operated, all the stop buttons D40 are operated in the push order navigation, and the 11 payout bells, which is the maximum payout number, win a prize, so that 11 The game medal is paid out and “GET !!” is displayed on the effect display device S40.

  On the other hand, when the player operates the middle stop button D42, which is a different stop button from the left stop button D41, which is the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, on the left in the upper part of the figure, the effect display device S40. All of the push order navigation displays at are deleted, and “Bad...” Is displayed as a push order failure effect. Next, the operation is performed in the order of the right stop button D43 and the left stop button D41, and the operation of all the stop buttons D40 is finished. However, the stop button D40 is in the order of “middle → right → left” which is the incorrect answer push order. As a result of the operation, any of the condition devices “winning 08” to “winning 10” wins and one game medal is paid out. The effect display device S40 does not display the characters “GET !!!!”. That is, when the stop button D40 is operated in the correct push order according to the instructions in the push order navigation, there is a payout that is the maximum payout number (the most advantageous payout number in the selected condition device) and the player Is displayed on the effect display device S40, but when the stop button D40 is operated in the incorrect order of pressing, the order of pressing when the stop button for incorrect answer is operated. Even when a message indicating that the navigation has failed is displayed and all the stop buttons D40 have been operated, the effect display device S40 is configured not to display an effect congratulating the player. It should be noted that “GET!” Is not displayed when the reels are stopped in the push order that is the maximum payout number of 11 payouts, but according to the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40. “GET!” Is displayed depending on whether or not the reel is stopped. That is, the reels are stopped in the order of “middle → right → left” in the state where the push order “left → middle → right” is displayed on the effect display device S40 as the push order navigation, and the maximum payout number is set. Will be displayed on the effect display device S40. In the state related to AT where the push order navigation is not displayed such as “normal game state”, if the player wins the push order bell and the player stops the reel in any push order, the correct answer will happen by chance. Even when 11 payouts are obtained, “GET!” Is not displayed on the effect display device S40. Similarly, with regard to the push order failure effect, similarly, the push order failure effect is displayed by stopping the reels in the push order in which the maximum payout number of 11 sheets is not paid out (being 1 payout). Instead, the push order failure effect is displayed depending on whether or not the reels are stopped without following the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40. That is, the reels are stopped in the order of “middle → right → left” in the state where the push order “left → middle → right” is displayed on the effect display device S40 as the push order navigation, and the maximum payout number is set. Even when a bell is won, a push order failure effect is executed in the effect display device S40. When the stop button is operated in a pressing order different from the correct pressing order, the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 is displayed until (1) the reel related to the third stop is stopped. (4) Until the reel related to the stop button is stopped by operating a stop button different from the correct push order until the stop button different from the correct push order is operated. Until it is operated, (5) it may be configured to display until the start lever related to the next game is operated.

  Next, FIG. 47 is an effect execution image diagram 3 during AT according to the present embodiment. First, in the left side of the figure, under the situation that the state related to AT is “additional specialization state” and the state related to RT is “RT1”, “replay-C”, which is a replay of 7 forward blacks, is won. In addition, the number of AT games is added and the lottery is won (winned by 1/2). In the effect display device S40, the left line is the push order in which black sevens can be aligned with the invalid line (lower line). A push order navigation display corresponding to is displayed as an arrow (display mode by an arrow image), and a message “Aim at 7!” Is displayed. The push order display device D270 is not displayed (push order navigation is not displayed). At this time, a light emitting mode in which the decorative lamp unit D150 of FIG. 1 is used to wave from left to right (for example, the left decorative lamp blinks so as to flow from the bottom to the top, and so on) The right decoration lamp blinks so that it flows from top to bottom, suggesting a left-to-right flow.) By suggesting "left-> middle-> right", etc. Push order navigation may be executed by the lamp unit D150. Thereby, for example, even when there is a situation where the push order navigation cannot be displayed due to the malfunction of the effect display device S40, it can be suggested that the game is a game aiming at 7 in the order of “left → middle → right”. Further, in this embodiment, replay is adopted as a role for aligning 7 matches to invalid lines. However, when a push order bell whose number varies depending on the push order is substituted, the malfunction of the effect display device S40 is fatal. Therefore, the suggestion of the push order navigation using the decorative lamp unit D150 works more effectively. In the case of the push order bell, even if a problem occurs in the effect display device S40, the push order display device D270 continues to display the push order navigation, but in the case of a new player, the push order display device. Since it is not easy to understand the pressing order represented by the display mode of D270, an insurance role against an irregular situation can be expected by using the lighting mode of the decorative lamp unit D150 that is visually easy to understand. Thereafter, when the stop button D40 is operated in the order of “left → middle → right”, the effect display device S40 displays that “50 games” is added as the number of AT added games. On the other hand, the push order navigation display corresponding to “Left → Middle → Right” is displayed as an arrow (display mode by an arrow image) and the message “Aim at 7!” Is displayed. When the middle stop button (stop button other than the left stop button, which is the correct stop button) is operated in the first stop, the entire screen will be darkened, but the navigation order of the arrows corresponding to “left → middle → right” The display and the message “Aim for 7 !!” are not deleted. After that, when all the reels are stopped, a display indicating that “50 games” has been added as the AT added game number is displayed on the effect display device S40. The number of AT games is added regardless of whether or not the push order navigation is followed, because the AT game number is added and the lottery is won at the time of replay win with 7 forward push blacks. Also, on the right side of the figure, in a situation where the state related to AT is “additional specialization state” and the state related to RT is “RT1”, “replay-C” which is a replay of 7 forward blacks is won. In addition, when the number of AT games is added and the lottery is not won (1/2 is not won), in the effect display device S40, the push order in which the black seven is not aligned with the invalid line (lower line) (“left As a push order navigation display corresponding to “push order other than“ middle → right ”), a push order navigation indicating the middle stop button D42 is displayed as a stop button related to the first stop. The push order display device D270 is not displayed. Then, after that, the middle stop button D42 is operated as the first stop button, but the effect relating to the addition of the number of games does not occur. As described above, in this embodiment, “re-game-C1” is a condition device that provides the same profit to the player regardless of the pressing order, and the AT addition lottery is executed based on the operation of the start lever. In other words, whether or not to win the AT extra lottery is determined based on the operation of the start lever, and whether or not the AT extra lottery wins is not different depending on the pushing order. As an effect to show, if “Re-Game-C” is won and AT is added to the lottery, the push order (“Left → Middle → Right”) that allows Black Seven to align with the invalid line is indicated. As a result, the player can feel as if an extra number of AT games has been generated as a result of the player arranging black sevens, and the fun of the game is improved. On the other hand, if “Re-Game-C” is won and AT is added and the lottery is not won, it indicates the push order (other than “Left → Middle → Right”) that Black Seven cannot be aligned with the invalid line. By doing so, the player does not realize that Black Seven has won the replay that can be aligned to the invalid line, i.e., does not notice that the lottery was not won by adding the number of AT games, so extra stress The game can proceed without feeling. Note that when the reels are stopped in the push order in which the black seven cannot be aligned with the invalid line, the normal replay (for example, replay 01) in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the player can proceed with the game without feeling uncomfortable. In addition, if the number of AT games is not selected and the lottery is not selected, the black game will not be added to the invalid line. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player who has the black sevens in the invalid line feels uncomfortable. In addition, in a state relating to an AT in which normally push order navigation can occur such as “AT state” (sometimes referred to as “AT state”), a particularly high effect can be expected. The same may be performed for a state related to an AT in which forward navigation does not occur (sometimes referred to as non-AT). In this case, unlike AT, push order navigation does not normally occur. For example, when “Replay-C” is won, it is impossible for Black Seven to align with the invalid line. Sudden occurrence of pushing order (other than “left → middle → right”) will lead to a sense of incongruity for the player, but black 7 may accidentally align with the invalid line during non-AT This situation is not desirable because there is a concern that the player may be aware of some special benefit due to the 7 lines in the invalid line. In addition, in the same figure, although an example of an effect relating to the addition of the number of AT games in the case of winning the “replay-C” which is a forward push black 7 replay and winning the AT addition lottery, The production mode for notifying the additional number of games is not limited to this, for example, when a game is won in the AT extra lottery in a certain game and the remaining AT game number is 50, the game won in the AT extra lottery In the game where the number of AT remaining games was not added, the game was elected to “replay-C1”, which is a forward 7 black replay in the subsequent game, and the invalid line (lower line) A push order navigation display corresponding to “Left → Middle → Right”, which is the push order in which the Black Seven can be aligned, is displayed with an arrow (display mode by an arrow image) and a message “Aim for 7 !!”. It is shown, wherein by black Seven align disable line (lower line) AT the number of remaining games may be configured to notify the subject that is plus 50 games. Similarly, for “replay-B”, which is a reverse replay white 7 replay, for example, when an AT extra lottery is won in a certain game and the number of remaining AT games is extra 50 games, the AT extra lottery In the game won in the game, the player is not notified that the number of AT remaining games has been added, and in the game won the “replay-B” which is the reverse push white 7 replay in the subsequent game, A push order navigation display corresponding to “right → middle → left”, which is the push order in which white sevens can be aligned, is displayed with an arrow (display mode by an arrow image) and “Aim at 7! May be configured to notify that the number of AT remaining games has been increased by 50 games by aligning white sevens on the invalid line (lower line). In addition, winning “Replay-C” and “Replay-B” and winning the AT game number lottery, winning the AT addition lottery in the previous game, and the number of AT additional games related to the winning If the situation is not informed, the number of AT added games related to the game and the number of AT added games related to the previous game are added together, and at the timing when 7 replays in the game are aligned with the invalid line You may comprise so that the total number of games can be alert | reported.

  Next, FIG. 48 is an AT execution effect image diagram 4 according to the present embodiment. First, in the upper left of the figure, under the situation that the state relating to AT is “additional specialization state” and the state relating to RT is “RT1”, “winning-A1” is established as a condition device that is a push order bell. A push order navigation display corresponding to “left → middle → right” is displayed on the effect display device S40, and “= 1” is displayed on the push order display device D270. After that, when the stop button D40 is operated as “left → middle → right” according to the push order navigation display, the bell wins and 11 payouts are made, and an indication that the number of AT games has been successfully added is “+ 10G” Is displayed on the effect display device S40. As shown in FIG. 28, in the “specialized state of addition” that can stay until 10 games are consumed (the “specialized state of added” shifts to the “AT state” by digesting 10 games). The AT game number lottery is also executed in the push order bell and the push order replay. Here, in this embodiment, both the push order bell and the push order replay game are configured to win 100% in the AT game number lottery (the addition of one or more AT games is executed). However, this is not limited and the push order bell is configured to win 100% in the AT game number lottery (the addition of one or more AT games is executed). The forward replay may be configured to win with a probability of winning an AT extra lottery with a probability of 70% (addition of one or more AT games is executed). Also, in the upper right of the figure, under the situation where the state relating to AT is “additional specialization state” and the state relating to RT is “RT1”, “winning-B” is established as a conditional device that is a common bell. Here, the common bell has the same profit for the player regardless of the order of pushing, and is a small role in which the number of AT games is not added and the lottery is not executed, but in the “specialized state of addition”, “left → middle → The push order navigation display corresponding to “right” is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the push order display device D270 is not displayed. Thereafter, the stop button D40 is operated as “left → middle → right” in accordance with the push order navigation display on the effect display device S40, but the effect related to the addition of the game is not displayed. Further, in the lower left of the figure, under the situation where the state relating to AT is “AT in progress” and the state relating to RT is “RT1”, “winning-A1” is established as a condition device that is a push order bell, and “left A push order navigation display corresponding to “→ middle → right” is displayed on the effect display device S40, and “= 1” is displayed on the push order display device D270. Thereafter, when the stop button D40 is operated by “left → middle → right” in accordance with the push order navigation display, the bell wins and 11 payouts are made, and the effect relating to the addition of the number of AT games is not displayed. Next, in the lower right of the figure, under the situation that the state relating to AT is “AT in progress” and the state relating to RT is “RT1”, “winning-B” is established as a condition device that is a common bell, and the effect display In the device S40, the push order navigation is not displayed, and is not displayed on the push order display device D270. Next, when the three stop buttons D40 are operated, the bell wins and 11 payouts are made regardless of the pressing order. As described above, when the common bell is won, when the “AT state” is selected, the push display navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order display device D270, while the “addition-specific state” is displayed. The push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270, but the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40. By configuring in this way, in the “specialized state of addition”, even if the common bell is won, the number of AT games is not increased, but the case where a push order bell that can be added to the number of AT games is won is won. By executing the same push order navigation, before the reel is stopped, it is determined that it is not a push order bell but a common bell, that is, at the timing before the reel is stopped at the game. It is possible to prevent a situation where it is found that the addition of the number of games is not executed, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. Further, when the common bell is won, the push order navigation similar to the push order bell may be displayed on the push order display device D270. In this case, in addition to the display of the push order navigation by the effect display device S40, the push order navigation is also displayed by the push order display device D270. Therefore, the player follows the push order navigation at the timing before the reel stop of the game. Since it is not possible to completely grasp whether the result is a pushing bell or a common bell, a higher effect is exhibited. As a specific means, when a common bell is won, a predetermined push order can be fixedly displayed, or can be selectively selected from any push order that can be displayed by a push order bell. It can also be displayed. The former has the merit of reducing the processing load because it does not perform the process of selecting the pressing order, and the latter has the merit that a more natural push order navigation display can be executed by eliminating the variation in the pressing order. . In addition, as an end condition for the “additional special state”, it may be completed with a predetermined probability (for example, 30%) when “re-game-A” is won, After the minimum guarantee game has passed (for example, 5 games) to be executed (stayed at), the game ends with a predetermined probability (for example, 30%) when “Replay-A” is won It is also possible to make a final lottery (for example, 30% for each game) when “replay-A” is won even during the minimum guaranteed number of games (for example, 5 games). Even if the final lottery is won, it may be terminated after the minimum guaranteed number of games has elapsed without ending the “additional specialization state” until the minimum guaranteed game has passed. .

  In the following, a process of generating bonus winning information and winning / replaying winning information from winning numbers, a process of determining an effect group number from winning / replaying winning information, and a process of determining a payout group number will be described. By executing the processing described below, the program processing stored in the ROM of the main control board M can be simplified, and the program area and data area required for the program processing can be compressed.

<<< Process for generating bonus winning information and winning / replay winning information from winning number >>>
Below, the process which produces | generates two types of winning information of bonus winning information and winning / replay winning information from a winning number is demonstrated. As described above, the condition device number can be referred to as a winning number, and hereinafter referred to as a winning number. The winning number is determined by the role lottery means. Two types of winning information, bonus winning information and winning / replay winning information, are generated from the determined winning number and stored in another storage area of the built-in RAMC 120. In this process, the winning number itself is not stored in the built-in RAMC 120.

  In the process of generating bonus winning information and winning / replay winning information, winning information relating to the bonus combination and winning / replay winning information are generated from the winning number using the winning information generation table shown in FIG. By using the winning information generation table, the control process can be simplified and the burden of the control process can be reduced. The winning information generation table is stored in the built-in ROMC 110.

<Specific method>
A numerical value of 0 to 27 is defined as the winning number. As shown in FIG. 10, winning numbers 0 to 18 are assigned as winning numbers that do not include a bonus combination, and winning numbers 19 to 27 are allocated as winning numbers that include a bonus combination. By assigning in this way, if the winning numbers are 0 to 18, it can be immediately determined that it is either winning or replay winning information. If the winning number is 19 or more, a process for generating winning information relating to the bonus combination and winning / replay winning information from the winning number is performed.

<Winning information generation table>
A specific example of the winning information generation table is shown in FIG. The winning information generation table shown in FIG. 49 is a table showing the correspondence between the address of the built-in ROMC 110 and the data stored at the address. In the example shown in FIG. 49, the address is shown in hexadecimal (H) and the data is shown in decimal (D).

  As shown in FIG. 49, data 19D is stored at address 1300H, data 38D is stored at address 1301H, data 52D is stored at address 1302H, and data 53D is stored at address 1303H. The data 54D is stored in the address 1304H, the data 57D is stored in the address 1305H, the data 71D is stored in the address 1306H, the data 72D is stored in the address 1307H, and the data 1308H is stored in the address 1308H. Data 73D is stored.

  The address 1300H corresponds to the winning number 19, the address 1301H corresponds to the winning number 20, the address 1302H corresponds to the winning number 21, the address 1303H corresponds to the winning number 22, and the address 1304H is Corresponding to winning number 23, address 1305H corresponds to winning number 24, address 1306H corresponds to winning number 25, address 1307H corresponds to winning number 26, and address 1308H corresponds to winning number 27. .

  The data of the winning information generation table is determined from (bonus winning information) and (winning / replay winning information) shown in FIG. The data stored in the winning information generation table is determined by (data) = (bonus winning information corresponding to the winning number) × 19D + (winning / replay winning information corresponding to the winning number).

  For example, address 1300H corresponds to winning number 19, and referring to FIG. 10, (bonus winning information of winning number 19) = 1D, (winning / replay winning information corresponding to winning number 19) = 0D. Therefore, the data of the address 1300H becomes 19D by calculating 1D × 19D + 0D. The address 1303H corresponds to the winning number 22, and referring to FIG. 10, (bonus winning information of the winning number 22) = 2D, (winning / replay winning information corresponding to the winning number 22) = 15D. Therefore, the data of the address 1303H becomes 53D by calculating 2D × 19D + 15D. Furthermore, the address 1308H corresponds to the winning number 27, and referring to FIG. 10, (bonus winning information of the winning number 27) = 3D, (winning / replay winning information corresponding to the winning number 27) ) = 16D. Therefore, the data of the address 1308H becomes 73D by calculating 3D × 19D + 16D. The values calculated in advance in this way are stored in each of the addresses 1300H to 1308H of the built-in ROMC 110. In other words, (bonus winning information) and (winning / replay winning information) are encoded by the above-described formula, and the values are stored in the addresses 1300H to 1308H of the built-in ROMC 110, respectively.

<Process for determining winning information>
The winning numbers determined by the role lottery means are stored in the A register and the L register. Next, a comparison operation between the data stored in the A register and the value 19D is executed. Specifically, a process of subtracting 19D from the data stored in the A register is executed. If the carry flag is not set to 1 by this calculation process, the winning information generation table shown in FIG. 49 is referred to. The comparison operation between the data stored in the A register and the value 19D is a process for determining whether or not to refer to the winning information generation table.

  As a result of comparing the data stored in the A register with the value 19D, if the data stored in the A register is less than 19D (when the carry flag = 1 is not satisfied), the data stored in the A register is stored in the L register. The stored data is stored in the built-in RAMC 120 as winning / replay winning information.

  As a result of comparing the data stored in the A register with the value 19D, if the data stored in the A register is 19D or more (when the carry flag = 1), the following processing is executed. .

  First, 12EDH is stored in the HL register. This 12EDH is an address value obtained by subtracting 13H (19D) from 1300H. In the following processing, a target address is determined using 12EDH as a reference address.

  The target address is obtained by adding the A register to the address value (12EDH) stored in the HL register. In other words, the address value (12EDH) stored in the HL register is the reference address, and the winning number stored in the A register is the offset value. In this manner, the target address is obtained by using the reference address and the offset value, and the data stored in the target address is read and stored in the A register.

  Next, the value stored in the A register is divided by 19D, the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the L register. The value (quotient) in the A register is (bonus winning information), and the value (remainder) in the L register is (winning / replay winning information). By doing so, it is possible to decode into (bonus winning information) and (winning / replay winning information).

  Next, the information stored in the A register is stored in the built-in RAMC 120 as bonus winning information, and the information stored in the L register is stored in the built-in RAMC 120 as winning / replay winning information.

<Example 1 When the winning number determined by the role lottery means is 19D (13H) and 19D is stored in the A register>
The carry flag = 1 is obtained by executing a comparison operation between the data 19D stored in the A register and the value 19D. Based on this result, 12EDH (HL register) + 13H (A register) is calculated. As a result, the target address becomes 1300H, and the data 19D of 1300H is read and stored in the A register, so that A register = 19D.

  Next, 19D stored in the A register is divided by the value 19D, and the quotient is stored in the A register and the remainder is stored in the L register. The quotient is 1D and the remainder is 0D. As described above, the address 1300H corresponds to the winning number 19. Therefore, it can be decoded that (bonus winning information) of the winning number 19 is 1 and (winning / replay winning information) of the winning number 19 is 0.

<Example 2 When the winning number determined by the role lottery means is 21D (15H) and 21D is stored in the A register>
The carry flag = 1 is obtained by executing a comparison operation between the data 21D stored in the A register and the value 19D. Based on this result, 12EDH (HL register) + 15H (A register) is calculated. As a result, the target address becomes 1302H, and the data 52D of 1302H is read and stored in the A register, so that A register = 52D.

  Next, 52D stored in the A register is divided by the value 19D, and the quotient is stored in the A register and the remainder is stored in the L register. The quotient is 2D and the remainder is 14D. As described above, the address 1302H corresponds to the winning number 21. Therefore, the winning number 21 (bonus winning information) is 2 and the winning number 21 (winning / replay winning information) is 14.

<<< Process to determine production group number from winning / replay winning information >>>
Processing for determining the production group number from the winning / replay winning information will be described.
In the processing on the main control board M side, the winning / replaying winning number is stored in the RAM, and when the bonus combination is won, the winning number of the bonus combination is stored in another storage area of the RAM. In the main control board M, an effect group number determination table is stored in the ROM. The effect group number determination table is used to determine the effect group number from the winning / replay winning number. For the winning / replay winning numbers, the production group number determination table is defined redundantly. By referring to the effect group number determination table, the effect group number can be determined from the winning / replay winning number. The effect group number determination table stores effect group numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of addresses. An effect group number can be determined by determining an address from the winning / replay winning number and reading the effect group number stored at that address.

<Direction group number>
The production group number is information corresponding to winning / replaying winning information and information in which at least a part of information is grouped. This effect group number is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S. For example, push order replays with fluctuations in RT can be grouped into the same effect group number, and push order bells with different payout numbers can be grouped into the same effect group number.

<< Example 1 of production group number determination table >>
The effect group number determination table is a table for specifying the effect group number by using the winning / replay winning information as an offset value. The effect group number determination table is stored in the built-in ROMC 110. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a first specific example of the effect group number determination table. Hereinafter, it is referred to as a production group number determination table 1. The effect group number determination table 1 shown in FIG. 50 is a table showing the correspondence between the address of the built-in ROMC 110 and the data stored at the address. In the example shown in FIG. 50, the address is shown in hexadecimal (H) and the data is shown in decimal (D).

  As shown in FIG. 50, data 0D is stored at address 1200H, data 1D is stored at address 1201H, data 2D is stored at address 1202H, and data 3D is stored at address 1203H. , Data 4D is stored at address 1204H, data 4D is stored at address 1205H, data 4D is stored at address 1206H, data 5D is stored at address 1207H, and address 1208H is stored at address 1208H. Data 5D is stored, data 5D is stored at address 1209H, data 5D is stored at address 120AH, data 5D is stored at address 120BH, data 5D is stored at address 120CH, Data 6D is stored at address 120DH, and The data 120D is stored in the address 120EH, the data 8D is stored in the address 120FH, the data 9D is stored in the address 1210H, the data 10D is stored in the address 1211H, and the data is stored in the address 1212H. 11D is stored.

  Address 1200H corresponds to winning number 0, address 1201H corresponds to winning number 1, address 1202H corresponds to winning number 2, address 1203H corresponds to winning number 3, and address 1204H is Corresponding to winning number 4, address 1205H corresponds to winning number 5, address 1206H corresponds to winning number 6, address 1207H corresponds to winning number 7, and address 1208H corresponds to winning number 8. Address 1209H corresponds to winning number 9, address 120AH corresponds to winning number 10, address 120BH corresponds to winning number 11, address 120CH corresponds to winning number 12, and address 120DH is winning Corresponding to number 13, address 120EH corresponds to winning number 14, and address 120FH is Corresponding to the winning number 15, the address 1210H corresponds to the winning number 16, the address 1211H corresponds to the winning number 17, the address 1212H corresponds to the winning number 18.

<Determination of production group number>
1200H is stored in the HL register, and winning / replay winning information corresponding to the winning number determined by the winning lottery means is stored in the C register. Next, the effect group number can be obtained by adding the value of the C register to the value of the HL register and reading the value stored at the address of the built-in ROMC 110 indicated by the added value. In other words, 1200H stored in the HL register is the reference address, and the winning / replaying winning information stored in the C register is the offset value. In this way, the target address can be obtained by using the reference address and the offset value, and the data stored in the target address can be read to obtain the effect group number.

  For example, when the winning number 7 is determined by the winning lottery means, 1207H is obtained by 1200H + 7D. The data corresponding to the address 1207H of the effect group number determination table 1 is 5, and the effect group number can be determined to be 5. When the winning number 12 is determined by the winning lottery means, 120CH is obtained by 1200H + 12D. The data corresponding to the address 120CH in the effect group number determination table 1 is 5, and the effect group number can be determined to be 5.

<< Example 2 of production group number determination table >>
In the example 1 of the effect group number determination table described above, an example is shown in which an effect group number determination table in which one effect group number is associated with one address of the built-in ROMC 110 is used. An effect group number determination table may be defined in association with two effect group numbers. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a second specific example of the effect group number determination table. Hereinafter, it is referred to as a production group number determination table 2. The effect group number determination table 2 shown in FIG. 51 is a table showing the correspondence between the address of the built-in ROMC 110 and the data stored at the address. In the example shown in FIG. 51, the address is shown in hexadecimal (H) and the data is shown in binary (D). In FIG. 51, the symbol “/” is shown between the upper and lower order to clearly indicate the separation between the upper 4-bit data and the lower 4-bit data. In practice, the data consists only of 0 and 1.

  Of the data stored in the effect group number determination table 2, the lower 4 bits of data correspond to even-numbered winning numbers, and the upper 4 bits of data correspond to odd-numbered winning numbers. Specifically, the following measures are taken.

  As shown in FIG. 51, 0001 / 0000B is stored in the address 1200H. The lower 4 bits of 0000 correspond to the winning number 0, and the upper 4 bits of 0001 correspond to the winning number 1. The address 1201H stores 0011 / 0010B. The lower 4 bits 0010 correspond to the winning number 2, and the upper 4 bits 0011 correspond to the winning number 3. The address 1202H stores 0100 / 0100B. The lower 4 bits 0100 correspond to the winning number 4, and the upper 4 bits 0100 correspond to the winning number 4. The address 1203H stores 0101 / 0100B. The lower 4 bits 0100 correspond to the winning number 4, and the upper 4 bits 0101 correspond to the winning number 5.

  Further, 0101 / 0101B is stored in the address 1204H. The lower 4 bits 0101 correspond to the winning number 5, and the upper 4 bits 0101 correspond to the winning number 5. At address 1205H, 0101 / 0101B is stored. The lower 4 bits 0101 correspond to the winning number 5, and the upper 4 bits 0101 correspond to the winning number 5. The address 1206H stores 0110 / 0101B. The lower 4 bits 0101 correspond to the winning number 5, and the upper 4 bits 0110 correspond to the winning number 6. The address 1207H stores 1000 / 0111B. The lower 4 bits 0111 correspond to the winning number 7, and the upper 4 bits 1000 correspond to the winning number 8. The address 1208H stores 1010 / 1001B. The lower 4 bits 1001 correspond to the winning number 9, and the upper 4 bits 1010 correspond to the winning number 10. The address 1209H stores 0000 / 1011B. The lower 4 bits 1011 correspond to the winning number 11.

<Determination of production group number >>
1200H is stored in the HL register, and winning / replay winning information corresponding to the winning number determined by the winning lottery means is stored in the A register. Next, a shift operation for shifting the data in the A register to the right is executed. By this shift operation, if the carry flag is 1, it can be determined that the winning / replaying winning information is an odd number, and if the carrying flag is 0, the winning / replaying winning information is determined to be an even number. can do. If the winning / replaying winning information is an odd number, the upper 4 bits of the data stored in the built-in ROMC 110 may be read. If the winning / replaying winning information is an even number, the data is stored in the built-in ROMC 110. It is only necessary to read out the lower 4 bits of the stored data.

  Further, as described above, since the data in the A register is shifted to the right, the value of the winning / replay winning information is divided by two. Since this value indicates a relative distance (offset value) from the address 1200H, the address from which the value is to be read can be calculated by adding the A register to the HL register.

  When the winning / replaying winning information is an odd number, the higher 4 bits and lower 4 bits of the data stored in the address are exchanged, and the logical grouping with 00001111B is performed to obtain the effect group number stored in the upper 4 bits. Can be obtained. When the winning / replay winning information is an even number, the effect group number stored in the lower 4 bits can be obtained by performing the logical product of the data stored in the address and 00001111B as it is.

  In this way, the production group number stored in the production group number determination table 2 can be determined by determining the address and the upper 4 bits or the lower 4 bits.

<< Example 3 of production group number determination table >>
As described above, the effect group number determination table is a table for specifying the effect group number using the winning / replay winning information as an offset value. The effect group number determination table is stored in the built-in ROMC 110. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a third specific example of the effect group number determination table. Hereinafter, it is referred to as a production group number determination table 3. The effect group number determination table 3 shown in FIG. 52 is a table showing the correspondence between the address of the built-in ROMC 110 and the data stored at the address. In the example shown in FIG. 52, the address is shown in hexadecimal (H) and the data is shown in binary (B).

  The effect group number determination table 3 shown in FIG. 52 is a table for specifying the effect group number by counting the value (1 (or 0)) defined corresponding to the winning / replay winning information. .

  As shown in FIG. 52, data 01111001B is stored at the address 1200H, data 00000111B is stored at the address 1201H, and data 11100000B is stored at the address 1202H.

  Address 1200H corresponds to winning numbers 0-7, address 1201H corresponds to winning numbers 8-15, and address 1202H corresponds to winning numbers 16-18. Specifically, the seventh bit of address 1200H corresponds to winning number 0, the sixth bit of address 1200H corresponds to winning number 1, the fifth bit of address 1200H corresponds to winning number 2, and the address 1200H The fourth bit corresponds to winning number 3, the third bit of address 1200H corresponds to winning number 4, the second bit of address 1200H corresponds to winning number 5, and the first bit of address 1200H corresponds to winning number 6 Correspondingly, the 0th bit of the address 1200H corresponds to the winning number 7.

  The seventh bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 8, the sixth bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 9, the fifth bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 10, and the fourth bit of the address 1201H. Corresponds to the winning number 11, the third bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 12, the second bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 13, the first bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 14, The 0th bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 15.

  Further, the seventh bit of the address 1202H corresponds to the winning number 16, the sixth bit of the address 1202H corresponds to the winning number 17, and the fifth bit of the address 1202H corresponds to the winning number 18.

  As shown in FIG. 10, in the winning numbers 0 to 18, the effect group number of one winning number is the same effect group without changing the value as compared with the case where the effect group number of the immediately preceding winning number is increased by 1. It may be a number. For example, the effect group number of the winning number 3 is 3, the effect group number of the winning number 2 immediately before the winning number 3 is 2, and the effect group number of the winning number 3 corresponds to the effect group number of the winning number 2 It has increased by one. Further, the effect group number of the winning number 11 is 5, the effect group number of the winning number 10 immediately before the winning number 11 is 5, and the effect group number of the winning number 11 is the same as the effect group number of the winning number 10 Does not change.

  The effect group number determination table 3 is a table configured by paying attention to such a change in the effect group number. When the effect group number of one winning number is increased by 1 with respect to the effect group number of the immediately preceding winning number, the value corresponding to the one winning number is set to 1 and does not change with respect to the immediately preceding effect group number. In this case, the production group number determination table 3 is defined by setting the value corresponding to one winning number to 0.

  In the example described above, the effect group number of the winning number 3 is 3, the effect group number of the winning number 2 immediately before the winning number 3 is 2, and the effect group number of the winning number 3 is the effect group of the winning number 2 Since the number is incremented by 1, the value corresponding to the winning number 3 is set to 1 (see the fourth bit of the address 1200H). Further, the effect group number of the winning number 11 is 5, the effect group number of the winning number 10 immediately before the winning number 11 is 5, and the effect group number of the winning number 11 is the same as the effect group number of the winning number 10 Therefore, the value corresponding to the winning number 11 is set to 0 (see the fourth bit of the address 1201H). That is, the value of the change in the production group number is stored in the production group number determination table 3 in association with the winning number.

  As described above, in the example 3 of the effect group number determination table, it is sufficient to secure an area of 1 bit for one winning number, and the table data to be stored in the built-in ROMC 110 can be compressed.

<Determination of production group number>
First, the data stored in 1200H of the built-in ROMC 110 is read out and stored in the HL register, and the value obtained by adding 1H to the winning / replay winning information corresponding to the winning number determined by the winning lottery means is stored in the C register. Let Further, 8H is stored in the B register. Next, a shift operation is performed on the data stored in the HL register as the number of times the value stored in the C register is shifted. In this process, an operation for shifting to the left is performed, and the number of times the carry flag is set to 1H is counted during the shift operation, and the counted result is the effect group number.

  If the value stored in the C register is less than 8, the data stored in 1200H of the built-in ROMC 110 is read out, stored in the HL register, and shifted with respect to the data stored in the HL register. Perform the operation. The number of times that the carry flag becomes 1H is counted by this shift operation, and the counted result is set as an effect group number.

  Further, when the value stored in the C register is 8 or more and less than 16, first, the data stored in 1200H of the built-in ROMC 110 is read out, stored in the HL register, and stored in the HL register. A shift operation is performed for the number of times the carry flag is set to 1H. Subsequently, the data stored in 1201H of the built-in ROMC 110 is read out, stored in the HL register, a shift operation is performed on the data stored in the HL register, the number of times that the carry flag becomes 1H is counted, In addition to the counting result, the added result is set as an effect group number. As described above, when the value stored in the C register is 8 or more and less than 16, the effect group number can be acquired using the data stored in 1200H and 1201H of the built-in ROMC 110.

  Furthermore, when the value stored in the C register is 16 or more and less than 19, first, the data stored in 1200H of the built-in ROMC 110 is read out, stored in the HL register, and stored in the HL register. A shift operation is performed on the data, and the number of times that the carry flag becomes 1H is counted. Subsequently, the data stored in 1201H of the built-in ROMC 110 is read out, stored in the HL register, a shift operation is performed on the data stored in the HL register, the number of times that the carry flag becomes 1H is counted, Is added to the counting result. Further, the data stored in 1202H of the built-in ROMC 110 is read out, stored in the HL register, a shift operation is performed on the data stored in the HL register, the number of times that the carry flag becomes 1H is counted, In addition to the counting result, the added result is set as an effect group number. As described above, when the value stored in the C register is 16 or more and less than 19, the effect group number can be acquired using the data stored in 1200H, 1201H, and 1202H of the built-in ROMC110. .

  In this way, according to the value stored in the C register, the data stored in 1200H to 1202H of the built-in ROMC 110 is read, and the total number of times that the carry flag becomes 1H is calculated, thereby producing the effect. A group number can be acquired.

<Example 1 When the winning / replay winning information is 0D>
First, since the winning / replaying winning information is 0D, the number of times of shifting is 0D + 1D. Therefore, after reading 01111001B stored in the address 1200H of the built-in ROMC 110 and storing it in the HL register, an operation of shifting the data stored in the HL register to the left by one time is executed. The number of times the carry flag becomes 1H is 0D by the shift operation, and “0” is determined as the effect group number.

<Example 2 When the winning / replay winning information is 5D>
First, since the winning / replay winning information is 5D, the number of times of shifting is 6 times by 5D + 1D. Therefore, after reading 01111001B stored in the address 1200H of the built-in ROMC 110 and storing it in the HL register, an operation for shifting the data stored in the HL register to the left by 6 times is executed. The number of times the carry flag becomes 1H is 4D by the shift operation, and “4” is determined as the effect group number.

<Example 3 When the winning / replay winning information is 10D>
First, since the winning / replaying winning information is 5D, the number of times of shifting is 11 times by 10D + 1D. Therefore, after reading 01111001B stored in the address 1200H of the built-in ROMC 110 and storing it in the HL register, an operation is first performed to shift the data stored in the HL register to the left by eight times. The number of times the carry flag becomes 1H by the shift operation is 5D.

  Further, since the number of times of shifting is 8 or more, next, 00000111B stored in the address 1201H of the built-in ROMC 110 is read out and stored in the HL register, and then the data stored in the HL register is 2 Performs an operation that shifts to the left by the number of times. The number of times the carry flag becomes 1H is 5D by the shift operation, and “5” is determined as the effect group number.

<Example 4 When the winning / replay winning information is 18D>
First, since the winning / replay winning information is 18D, the number of times of shifting is 19 by 18D + 1D. Therefore, after reading 01111001B stored at address 1200H of the built-in ROMC 110 and storing it in the HL register, an operation of shifting the data stored in the HL register to the left by 8 times is executed. The number of times the carry flag becomes 1H by the shift operation is 5D.

  Further, since the number of times of shifting is 8 or more, next, 00000111B stored in the address 1201H of the built-in ROMC 110 is read out and stored in the HL register, and then the data stored in the HL register is set to 8 Performs an operation that shifts to the left by the number of times. The number of times the carry flag is set to 1H by the shift operation is 8D by adding 3D.

  Further, since the number of times of shifting is 16 or more, next, 11110000B stored in address 1202H of built-in ROMC 110 is read out and stored in the HL register, and then the data stored in the HL register is 3 Performs an operation that shifts to the left by the number of times. The number of times the carry flag is set to 1H by the shift operation is further 3D added to 11D, and “11” is determined as the effect group number.

  In the example described above, an example in which the effect group number is determined by counting the number of 1B included in the data stored in the effect group number determination table 3 is shown. The production group number may be determined by counting the number of 0B included in the recorded data.

<<< Determining process for Idama group number >>>
When the winning number is determined by the role lottery means, the lottery table is referred to. The lottery table stores a winning number, a numerical value for comparison with a random number, and the like. Further, the lottery table number is determined together with the winning number with reference to the lottery table. For this reason, the so-called lottery table also stores data corresponding to the outgoing ball group number. This payout group number is a number used when performing a lottery (AT lottery, AT extra lottery, AT state lottery, etc.) related to the instruction function.

  This winning group number is assigned in correspondence with the winning number, but not necessarily in one-to-one correspondence. For some winning numbers, a duplicate outgoing group number may be assigned. is there. The lottery table can be configured by prescribing all the information for each of the winning numbers, but if the information regarding duplicated ball group numbers is also prescribed, the lottery table capacity increases and the lottery table It is necessary to process the information read from the main control board M, and the processing on the main control board M must be complicated. For this reason, when the lottery table is defined, the information regarding the duplicated payout group numbers can be reduced by including the information indicating that the lottery table number is duplicated, and the main control board M can be reduced. It is possible to improve the efficiency by simplifying the processing in.

  FIG. 53 is a table showing an example of a lottery table. In addition, in FIG. 53, the case where there are six winning numbers of 7 to 12 as the winning numbers having a payout group number of 2 is illustrated. The first line of the table shown in FIG. 53 is data indicating that the winning number is designated and that the winning number is 7D. The second row of the table shown in FIG. 53 is data indicating that the information regarding the appearance group number is duplicated and that the number of times of duplication is 6D. The third row of the table shown in FIG. 53 is data indicating that it is data indicating a payout group number and that the payout group number is 2D. The fourth row of the table shown in FIG. 53 is data indicating that the numerical value (determination value, probability data) is 2 bytes. The fifth row of the table shown in FIG. 53 is data indicating that the actual number (determination value, probability data) is 2034D.

  In the example shown in FIG. 53, the winning number is 7, and the condition device (name) is data of winning-A1 (see FIG. 10). As shown in FIG. 10, the condition device (name) with the winning number 8 is winning-A2, the condition device (name) with the winning number 9 is winning-A3, and the condition device (name) with the winning number 10 Is the winning-A4, the condition device (name) with the winning number 11 is the winning-A5, and the condition device (name) with the winning number 12 is the winning-A6. The winning group numbers of these winning numbers 7 to 12 are both 2 and are defined in duplicate. As described above, when the information regarding the winning group number is defined for each of the winning numbers 7 to 12 for each winning number, the capacity of the lottery table must be increased.

  As shown in FIG. 53, data indicating that the number of times of duplication is 6 is stored in the second row. For this reason, it is possible to omit the information regarding the winning ball group numbers for the winning numbers 8 to 12, and the capacity of the lottery table can be reduced. Furthermore, with respect to the winning numbers 8 to 12, it is possible to omit the process of reading out the information related to the outgoing ball group number from the lottery table, thereby simplifying and speeding up the process.

  By configuring as described above, according to the rotating type gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a plurality of states relating to AT are provided, and the push order navigation and the sub control on the push order display device D270 on the main control board M side. By notifying the push order navigation on the effect display device on the substrate S side in an appropriate display mode based on the state related to the AT, a user-friendly gaming machine can be obtained.

(Modification 1 from this embodiment)
In the present embodiment, it is configured to be able to shift to the “additional special state” by winning the watermelon B in the “AT state”, but the transition of the AT state (a state in which the push order navigation can occur) ( The configuration of (migration) is not limited to that of this embodiment. Therefore, the configuration of AT state transition (transition), which is different from the present embodiment, is referred to as a first modification from the present embodiment, and only changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an AT state transition control process according to the modified example. This process corresponds to the above-described FIG. The processes of steps 1402 to 1434 and steps S1140 to 1444 are the same as the AT state transition control process shown in FIG. 20, and the processes of steps 1439-1 and 1439-2 are different.

  In step 1426 in the first modification, when the state related to the AT is “high probability state”, the game section is “advantageous section”, and when the game section is “advantageous section”. , Push order navigation is executed one or more times, BB is executed one or more times, or a predetermined number of games (1500 games in this example) is not satisfied that the “advantageous section” continues, (I.e., even if the low-probability state transition lottery is won, if the low-probability transition condition is not satisfied because the push order navigation is not executed once or more, etc., "High probability state" is configured not to end).

  In step 1436, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the special state transition lottery has been won. For example, it is possible to determine whether or not a special state transition lottery is won depending on whether or not a winning device E is won as a condition device. In the case of Yes in step 1436, in other words, when the special state transition lottery is won, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the processing of step 1438, and in step 1439-1, the special winning command Set (command to sub side). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1436, in other words, if the special state transition lottery has not been won, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M, in step 1439-2, performs a special non-winning command (to the sub side). Command).

  The special winning command is a command indicating that the shift to the specialization state for addition is won, and the special non-winning command is a command indicating that the shift to the specialization state for addition is missed (non-winning). As will be described later, when a special winning command is sent to the sub-control board S, a winning battle effect is executed, and when a special non-winning command is sent to the sub-control board S, a defeating battle effect is executed. Is done.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing remaining game number management processing according to the modification. This process corresponds to the above-described FIG. The processes in steps 3402, 3404 and 3410 are the same as the remaining game number management process shown in FIG. 24, and the process in step S3408 is different.

  In step 3408, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state relating to the AT is an in-AT state, a special precursor state, or an added special state. In the case of Yes in step 3408, in other words, if the state related to the AT is the state during AT, the specialization precursor state, or the specialization state of addition, in step 3410, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the AT counter value. Is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1700).

  By doing in this way, the number of times that push order navigation is executed is subtracted in the AT state, the special sign state, or the added special state.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a start lever operation process according to a modification. This process corresponds to the above-described FIG. The processing of steps 2302 to 2316, 2350, 2400, 2450, and 2700 is the same processing as the start lever operation processing shown in FIG. 37, and the processing of steps 2318 to 2330 is different.

  After executing the processing of steps 2350, 2400, 2450, 2700, and 2316, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the battle effect execution flag is off in step 2318. In the case of Yes in step 2318, in other words, when the battle effect execution flag is off, in step 2320, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special winning command has been received from the main side. To do.

  In the case of Yes in step 2320, in other words, when a special winning command is received from the main side, in step 2322, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs a battle effect (win) executed over 10 games. Set the command to execute In addition, when the BB is won during the execution of the battle effect (win) (for example, 3 games after the start of the battle effect), the battle effects after the 4th game scheduled to be executed before the BB win will be rewritten. For example, it may be configured such that “the main character uses a special technique” in the fourth game and “enemy character is defeated” in the fifth game. In addition, when the BB is won at the tenth game from the start of the battle effect (win), the rewriting of the effect may not be executed. Further, after the bonus has ended, the continuation of the battle effect (for example, the 6th game after the battle effect is won at the 5th game) is not executed, and the “addition special state” is entered after the bonus ends. You may comprise.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2320, in other words, when the special winning command is not received from the main side, in step 2324, the CPUSC of the sub control board S receives the special non-winning command from the main side. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2324, in other words, when a special non-winning command is received from the main side, in step 2326, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs a battle effect (defeat) that is executed for 10 games. ) Is executed. In addition, when the BB is won during the execution of the battle effect (defeat) (for example, 3 games after the start of the battle effect), the battle effects after the 4th game scheduled to be executed before the BB win will be rewritten. For example, it may be configured such that “the main character uses a special technique” in the fourth game and “enemy character is defeated” in the fifth game. In other words, the battle production that was scheduled to be defeated is rewritten to become a victory. In addition, when BB is won at the 10th game from the start of the battle production (defeat), the “hero loses” at the 10th game, and at the 11th game (when the bet button is operated or the start lever is operated) It may be configured as “the main character is resurrected and won”. In addition, after the bonus is ended, the continuation of the battle effect (for example, the sixth game or later when the battle effect is won in the fifth game) is not executed, and the “AT state” is set after the bonus ends. It may be configured. When the special transition lottery can be executed by winning the bonus or by the combination in the bonus, it may be configured to be in the “additional special state” after the bonus ends.

  When the processing of steps 2322 and 2326 is executed, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the battle effect execution flag in step 2328. Next, in step 2330, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a predetermined value (10) in the battle effect counter, and shifts to the next process (process in step 2110).

  By doing in this way, when any command of the special winning command or the special non-winning command is transmitted from the main control board M, the battle effect is started. As described above, when a special winning command is transmitted from the main control board M, a winning battle effect is executed, and when a special non-winning command is transmitted from the main control board M, a defeating battle effect is performed. Executed. In the present modification, the number of times that the battle effect is executed is 10, but it can be set to an arbitrary number.

  In the case of No in step 2324, in other words, when the special non-winning command has not been received from the main side, the CPUSC of the sub control board S immediately shifts to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  In the case of No in step 2318, in other words, if the battle effect execution flag is not OFF, in step 2332, the CPUSC of the sub control board S decrements the battle effect counter value by one.

  Next, in step 2334, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the battle effect counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 2334, in other words, when the battle effect counter value is 0, in step 2336, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the battle effect execution flag and performs the next process (in step 2110). Process). On the other hand, if the CPUSC of the sub control board S is No in step 2334, in other words, if the battle effect counter value is a positive value, the CPUSC immediately shifts to the next process (process of step 2110).

  In this way, after the battle effect is started, when the game is executed once, the battle effect counter value is decreased by 1 and when the battle effect counter value becomes 0, the battle effect ends. .

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a start lever operation process according to a modification. This process corresponds to the above-described FIG. The processing in steps 2502 to 2508 is the same processing as the start lever operation processing shown in FIG. 37, and the processing in steps 2510 and 2512 is different.

  In the case of Yes in step 2504, in other words, when there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in step 2510, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the battle effect flag is off. Determine whether. If the CPUSC of the sub control board S is Yes in Step 2510, in other words, if the battle effect flag is off, the CPUSC proceeds to Step 2508. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2510, in other words, if the battle effect flag is on, in step 2512, the CPUSC of the sub control board S deletes the push order navigation display and performs the next process (in step 2110). Process).

  By doing in this way, even if the battle effect is performed and the push order navigation is executed, if the push order is incorrect at the stage of the first trunk stop, the push order navigation is performed. Can be canceled.

  Next, FIG. 57 is an AT execution effect execution image diagram 5 according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment. As shown in the upper left in the figure, when winning-E (watermelon B) is won as a condition device in the state of being in the AT state, “GET!” Is displayed on the effect display device S40 and added. Will be shown to have won. By winning the prize-E, the player wins the special state transfer lottery and shifts to the state shown in the upper center.

  As shown in the upper center figure, a battle effect is executed, and push order navigation is displayed in the second number display mode group. The state regarding the AT at this time is a “specialized sign state”. Further, the number of times the push order navigation is executed is subtracted, and the effect display device S40 displays that the remaining number of push order navigations is 39 games. When the battle effect is performed 10 times and the battle effect is finished, the state shifts to the state shown in the upper right figure.

  As shown in the upper right figure, the image changes to a background image indicating that the battle effect has been won. As a result, the state related to the AT shifts to the “additional special state”. The number of times the push order navigation is executed is subtracted, and the effect display device S40 displays that the remaining number of push order navigations is 29 games.

  On the other hand, in the stage shown in the upper left figure, if the winning device E- (Watermelon B) is not won as the condition device, the special state transfer lottery is not won and the state shifts to the state shown in the lower center.

  As shown in the lower center figure, a battle effect is executed, and push order navigation is displayed in the first numeric display mode group. The state related to the AT at this time is “AT in-state”. Further, the number of times the push order navigation is executed is subtracted, and the effect display device S40 displays that the remaining number of push order navigations is 39 games. When the battle effect is performed 10 times and the battle effect is finished, the state shifts to the state shown in the lower right diagram.

  As shown in the lower right figure, the battle effect is defeated and remains in the “AT state”. The number of times the push order navigation is executed is subtracted, and the effect display device S40 displays that the remaining number of push order navigations is 29 games. In the first modification from the present embodiment, in the “specialized sign state”, the push order navigation is displayed in the second number display mode group at 1/2 of the push order navigation occurrence, In the “state” and the battle effect, the push order navigation is displayed in the second number display mode group at 1/5 when the push order navigation occurs, and the player is executed in the battle effect. Counting the number of times that the push order navigation is in the second number display mode gives a sense of expectation to the battle victory, that is, the transition to the “additional special state”. In addition, it is comprised so that the push order navigation which is a 1st number display mode can also be displayed during execution of a battle production. In addition, you may comprise so that "GET!" Mentioned above may not be displayed on effect display apparatus S40 during execution of a battle effect. Specifically, if the player is in the “AT state” and the battle effect is not executed, the winning bell is won and the reels are stopped in the correct pushing order, and 11 payouts are made. At the same time, “GET!” Is displayed on the effect display device S40, while the “AT state” is displayed and the battle effect is being executed, the push order bell is won, and the reels are placed according to the correct push order. If stopped, there are 11 payouts, but “GET!” Is not displayed on the effect display device S40. By comprising in this way, a player will pay attention to the result of a battle effect, without disturbing the display of a battle effect. In addition, the above-described configuration in which the entire screen is darkened when the push order navigation is not followed (when the stop button is operated in a push order different from the push order navigation) may be applied to the push order bell. As an example, if you are in “AT state” and the battle effect is not being executed, if you win the push order bell and stop the reel in the push order different from the correct push order, the entire screen If it is dark and there is one payout, and it is in “AT state” and the battle effect is being executed, the push order bell is won and the reels are placed in the push order different from the correct push order. When stopped, one sheet is paid out, but the entire screen may not be darkened. By comprising in this way, a player will pay attention to the result of a battle effect, without disturbing the display of a battle effect.

  By configuring as described above, according to the swivel type gaming machine according to the modified example 1 from the present embodiment, the watermelon B was won in the “AT state” and the special transition lottery was not won. Even in such a case, by configuring a battle effect between 10 games, each time the player wins the watermelon B in the “AT state”, he / she has a sense of expectation for the transition to the “specialized state”. It will be held and the fun of the game will be improved. In addition, during execution of the battle effect, even when the battle effect (defeat) in which the state related to the AT is “AT state” is executed, the battle effect (win) in which the state related to the AT is “specialized sign state” Even during execution, the display of the number of remaining AT games on the effect display device S40 is subtracted every time the game is consumed. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to make it difficult to determine which state is related to the AT during execution of the battle effect, and pay attention to the result of the battle effect.

(Modification 2 from this embodiment)
In this embodiment, the push order bell is selected as 6 choices, the push order replay is chosen as 3 choices, and the correct push order can be notified by the push order navigation. The structure which concerns on is not limited to the thing of this embodiment. Accordingly, a configuration related to a condition device that is different from the present embodiment and has a different combination of stop display depending on the pressing order is referred to as a second modified example from the present embodiment, and only the modified points from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 58 is an AT execution effect execution image diagram 6 according to Modification 2 from the present embodiment. First, in the second modification from the present embodiment, in the same figure, when the push order navigation occurs in the game in which the push order bell is won, and in the game in which the push order replay is won, An example of push order navigation with the case where it generate | occur | produces is shown in figure.

  First, on the left side of the figure, “replay-A”, which is a push order replay game, is selected as the condition device, and the push order of the push order replay has three choices, but in the effect display device S40, there are six choices. Navigate the push order. Also, on the right side of the figure, as the condition device, “Prize-A1”, which is the push order bell, is won, and the push order of the push order bell is 6 choices. Is navigating. Further, the display mode of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 is the same for the push order replay game and the push order bell.

  However, when only the information about the first stop button is displayed, such as “left” alone, the player can know that the re-game has been won as the condition device. Because it ’s a replay, you wo n’t reduce medals, but you ca n’t increase medals,

  By configuring as described above, according to the rotating type gaming machine according to the modified example 2 from the present embodiment, when the push order navigation is displayed at the time of the push order replay winning which is the three choices, A situation in which the start lever is operated and the reels are not stopped by configuring the display device S40 to display the push order navigation in the same display manner as when the push order navigation is displayed when a certain push order bell is won. Then, since it is difficult for the player to determine whether the player has won the bell or the re-game, it is a re-game in which the game medal does not increase just by subtracting the number of AT remaining games before the reel is stopped. It is possible to prevent a person from feeling stress by sensing something.

  In the second modification from the present embodiment, when the push order navigation is displayed when the push order replay winning is the three choice, the six choice push order navigation is performed in the effect display device S40 in the same manner as the push order bell. However, the display mode of the push order navigation of the push order replay in the effect display device S40 and the display mode of the push order navigation of the push order bell may be different. As an example, push order navigation related to push order replay has a push order number displayed in a blue circle, and push order navigation related to a push bell represents a push order number in a yellow circle. You may comprise so that is displayed. With such a configuration, in the AT state (a state in which the push order navigation can be displayed), the display of most push order navigations can be six choices, and the player can press which stop button after the second stop. It is possible to prevent the user from knowing what to do and to achieve a game progression with a good tempo.

<<< Relationship with door opening error >>>
Even when it is detected that the front door DU is opened while the reel M50 is rotating, the reel M50 continues to rotate. Although the reel M50 is rotated, the stop button D40 cannot be operated when the front door DU is opened. The fact that the stop button D40 cannot be operated is notified by the lamp of the stop button D40. For example, the lamp is lit in red when it can be operated, and the lamp is lit in blue when it cannot be operated. The lamp may be turned on when it can be operated, and the lamp may be turned off when it cannot be operated.

  Further, when the front door DU is opened while the push order is displayed on the push order display device D270 controlled by the main control board M, information indicating that the front door DU is opened ( Error display) is displayed on the push order display device D270, and when the front door DU is closed and the door opening error is released, the push order is displayed on the push order display device D270.

  Next, FIG. 59 is an image of the door opening error occurrence. The upper left diagram in FIG. 59 is an image diagram showing a state where the reel M50 is rotating. This state is “re-game-A” which is a push-order replay game under the situation of “AT state” and “RT1” (not limited to this as long as push-order navigation occurs). I am elected. The first number display mode group is displayed on the effect display device S40, “= 1” is displayed on the push order display device D270, and is displayed as a push order navigation display corresponding to “left → middle → right”. Has been. In this state, since the operation of the stop button is effective, it is lit in red.

  59 is a conceptual diagram showing a state in which the front door DU is opened while the reel M50 is rotating. When the front door DU is opened, the effect display device S40 displays that the front door DU is being opened (that a door opening error is occurring), and the stop button becomes invalid and blue. Lights on. In addition, “DE” is displayed on the push order display device D270 as a door opening error, and the reel M50 is kept rotated.

  The figure shown in the upper right of FIG. 59 is an image diagram showing a state in which the opened front door DU is closed. By closing the front door DU, the door opening error is resolved, and the push order navigation is displayed again on the effect display device S40 and the push order display device D270. In addition, since the reel M50 has been kept rotating, it has already reached a constant speed, so that no acceleration processing is required until the speed is reached, and the stop button is effective immediately after closing the front door DU. And turns red. The stop button lamp color and notification mode may be changed. (1) Stop button valid = green, stop button invalid = red, (2) Stop button valid = lit, stop button invalid = off, etc. You may comprise as follows.

  In the case where the specification is such that the game can be played (the stop button can be operated) even when the front door DU is opened while the push order navigation is displayed on the push order display device D270, the effect display device S40. Displays a message such as “door is open”, outputs a sound such as “door is open” from speaker S20, and continues to display push order navigation on push order display device D270. Thus, it is possible to advance the game according to the push order navigation while notifying that the front door DU is opened.

  In addition to displaying the push order navigation on the push order display device D270, the stop button to be stopped next among the stop buttons D41, D42, and D43 may be lit in red (the other stop buttons are blue). Lights up).

  Further, in the case of a specification that allows a game to be played even if an error that can be canceled occurs while the push order navigation is being displayed on the push order display device D270, the following may be performed. In addition, as a releasable error, there is a medal detection error that can be output when a game medal is detected with the blocker D100 turned off (in a state where no medal flow path is formed).

  First, a message about an error such as “Please check” is displayed on the effect display device S40, and a voice indicating the occurrence of an error such as “boo boo” is output from the speaker S20. In D270, the push navigation is continuously displayed. In this case, when the front door DU is also opened, a sound such as “the door is open” is simultaneously output from the speaker S20. By continuously displaying the push order navigation, even if a releasable error occurs or the front door DU is opened, the game can be advanced according to the push order navigation while notifying that effect.

  Further, it may be after the third stop (the timing when the stop button that becomes the third stop is pushed (or the timing after the push), or when the stop button that becomes the third stop is released (or released). The error code indicating the releasable error is pressed and displayed on the order display device D270.

  Further, when the power is once turned off and turned on again while the push order navigation is displayed on the push order display device D270, “display of the push order display device D270 → constant speed operation of the reel → sound It returns in the order of “output → display of effect display device S40”.

  Next, FIG. 60 is an operation diagram showing an example of an advantageous section indicator lighting timing of the swivel type gaming machine according to the present example. In the figure, in two consecutive games of the first game and the second game, a situation is shown in which the game section that was the “normal section” in the first game is set as the “favorable section” in the second game. (For example, in the first game, the state related to AT is “AT precursor state”, and from the second game, the state related to AT shifts to “AT state”). The game is progressing in time series from the left side to the right side. In this example, the timing when the advantageous section indicator YH starts to light is the second game from the timing when the start lever D50 is operated (that is, the timing of 1) in the first game (normal section). In two games, the timing is one before the end of the wait state and the insertion of a game medal (that is, the timing of 7). In the case where the replay is stopped and displayed, the operation of the start lever D50 related to the second game as the next game is started from the timing when the start lever D50 is operated in the first game (that is, the timing of 1). The advantageous section indicator YH is turned on before the time becomes effective. In addition, if it is within this section, the timing for turning on the advantageous section indicator is not limited. For example, the timing at which the reel M50 starts rotating after the operation of the start lever D50 (that is, the timing of 2) is stopped. The timing when the button D40 is operated for the first stop (ie, timing 3), the timing when any of the stop buttons D40 is operated for the second stop (ie, timing 4), and the one of the stop buttons D40 is The advantageous section indicator is lit at the timing of the third stop operation (ie, timing 5), or when the game medal payout is started (ie, timing 6) due to the winning of a small role, etc. It is good.

  In the case where the specification is such that the game can be played (the stop button can be operated) even when the front door DU is opened while the push order navigation is displayed on the push order display device D270, the effect display device S40. Displays a message such as “door is open”, outputs a sound such as “door is open” from speaker S20, and continues to display push order navigation on push order display device D270. Thus, it is possible to advance the game according to the push order navigation while notifying that the front door DU is opened.

  In addition to displaying the push order navigation on the push order display device D270, the stop button to be stopped next among the stop buttons D41, D42, and D43 may be lit in red (the other stop buttons are blue). Lights up).

  Further, in the case of a specification that allows a game to be played even if an error that can be canceled occurs while the push order navigation is being displayed on the push order display device D270, the following may be performed. In addition, as a releasable error, there is a medal detection error that can be output when a game medal is detected with the blocker D100 turned off (in a state where no medal flow path is formed).

  First, a message about an error such as “Please check” is displayed on the effect display device S40, and a voice indicating the occurrence of an error such as “boo boo” is output from the speaker S20. In D270, the push navigation is continuously displayed. In this case, when the front door DU is also opened, a sound such as “the door is open” is simultaneously output from the speaker S20. By continuously displaying the push order navigation, even if a releasable error occurs or the front door DU is opened, the game can be advanced according to the push order navigation while notifying that effect.

  Further, after the third stop, an error code indicating a cancelable error is displayed on the push order display device D270.

  Further, when the power is once turned off and turned on again while the push order navigation is displayed on the push order display device D270, “display of the push order display device D270 → constant speed operation of the reel → sound It returns in the order of “output → display of effect display device S40”.

<<< Example of gaming state transition diagram >>>
FIG. 61 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the configuration of a game state transition diagram applicable to this example. There are two types of game sections: a “normal section” and an “advantageous section”.

  In the normal section, the BR probability that is the combined winning probability of BB (big bonus) and RB (regular bonus) is 1/1400. The ratio of winning BB and RB when winning BR is 1: 5. In addition, it is configured to digest about 32 games per 1000 yen.

  By winning BB or RB in the “normal section”, it shifts to “BB or RB” in the figure. Thereby, the “normal section” is set to the “advantageous section”. Furthermore, when execution of BB or RB ends, the process shifts to “RT2”. Here, “RT2” has a BR probability that is a combined winning probability of BB and RB, which is 1/50 higher than the BR probability in the normal section. For this reason, “RT2” is in a relatively advantageous state. The ratio of winning BB and RB when winning BR at “RT2” is 1: 5. Also, “RT2” has a finite number of 50 games. If 50 games are stayed and BB or RB cannot be won, “normal section” is set. The probability of winning BB or RB when “RT2” (probability of winning 1/50 BR between 50 games) is about 65%. If you win BB or RB again In order to shift to “RT2”, the resort is configured to continue in a 65% loop. In addition, as another route for the consecutive resort, by transferring to the “RT1” which is an advantageous section by winning a special replay which is a re-game that triggers the transition of the RT state in the “normal section” It becomes. “RT1” has a BR probability, which is a combined winning probability of BB and RB, being 1/50 higher than the BR probability in the normal section (similar to RT2). Therefore, although “RT1” is in a relatively advantageous state, the ratio of winning BB and RB when winning BR at “RT1” is 1: 8, and “RT1” Since the game is limited to 16 games, “RT2” is more advantageous to the player than “RT1”. If “RT1” stays for 16 games and BB or RB cannot be won, the process shifts to “normal section”. If the game staying in “RT1”, “RT2”, “BB or RB” that is “advantageous section” continues for 400 games (not via “normal section”) Or, when an arbitrary end condition (for example, 50 games have passed without winning BB or RB in “RT2”) is satisfied, the “advantageous section” is set to the “normal section”. Further, when the “advantageous section” is set to the “normal section”, the information related to the “advantageous section” is initialized.

It should be noted that the configuration shown in the figure may be changed as appropriate, and may be configured as follows. Moreover, the following structures may be applied independently and a some structure may be combined.
(1) The setting from “normal section” to “favorable section” is set by winning a lottery according to the advantageous section shift lottery probability defined in the condition device.
(2) In the “favorable section”, the winning rate of BB or RB can be changed for each state. The state may be an RT state or a state relating to AT.
(3) When a game staying in one of the “advantageous sections” continues for a predetermined game (for example, 400 games) (without passing through the “normal section”), it is set to “normal section”. At the same time, the information related to the “favorable section” is initialized.

  In addition, “RT3” having the same BR probability as “normal section” may be provided as an RT state to be “advantageous section”. In such a case, the winning rate of replay in “RT3” Is designed to be higher than the “normal section”, so that the number of medals does not decrease even if BR is not won (for example, an average of −0.1 per game), and BR between 50 games at “RT2” If it is not possible to win, it may be configured to shift from “RT2” to “RT3”. If you can win the BR again at “RT3”, after the BR ends, you will move to “RT2”. If you cannot win the BR at “RT3” and have passed 50 games, you will be in the “normal section”. You may comprise so that it may set.

<Other changes>
In this example, the first BB combination in which the first BB is executed by winning the prize and the second BB combination in which the second BB having lower profit than the first BB is executed by winning the prize are executed. Further, the first BB combination and the second BB combination may be won in duplicate (providing a combination of “first BB + second BB”). In such a configuration, when “first BB + second BB” is won, the symbol combination (first BB combination) corresponding to the execution of the highly profitable first BB can be stopped and displayed, and after the execution of the first BB is finished, The symbol combination corresponding to 2BB (second BB combination) may be displayed in a stopped state (the second BB is won even during execution of the first BB). In addition, when “1BB + 2BB” is won, by executing the highly profitable 1BB first, for example, when the closing time of the game hall is approaching, “1BB + 2BB” is won. In such a case, the second BB with low profit is executed first, the game hall is closed during the execution of the second BB, and the game must be terminated without executing the first BB with high profit. Can be prevented.

  After the operation of the first BB is completed, the winning configuration of the second BB may be notified immediately, or may be notified after being hidden (after a predetermined game has passed without notification). In such a case, it may be configured such that the winning probability of replay is increased in the incubation period after the operation of the first BB is completed. Moreover, you may comprise so that the production | presentation which suggests 2nd BB winning possibility may be performed when it is made to hide (for example, "BB consecutive resort chance time!" Is displayed on production display device S40). . In such a configuration, if there is no case where the second BB is not won after the end of the first BB, it will be definitive that the production occurrence = the second BB is won, so only the first BB is won. Even after the operation of the first BB is finished, it is preferable that the production suggesting the possibility of winning the second BB is executed (the production mode after the completion of the first BB is the same as described above. For example, “BB Renso Chance Time !!” is displayed on the effect display device S40). In addition, even when only the first BB is won, and after the operation of the first BB is finished, the first BB is won again, and the execution of the performance suggesting the possibility of winning the second BB is not stopped. May be. Further, once the winning of the second BB is notified, the winning of the first BB may be notified (for example, display of “BB consecutive resort chance time!” → display of “sorry” → “first” 1BB won !!!! ”). Furthermore, when the second BB is hidden after the first BB operation is completed after the first winning operation is completed during the AT, the effect display device S40 returns to the AT after the AT is being prepared, etc. However, the internal reduction in the number of remaining games may be continuously interrupted. When the first BB and the second BB are selected and won, the number of payouts from the start of the operation of the first BB to the end of the operation of the second BB may be accumulated and displayed on the effect display device S40 or the like.

In this example,
(1) When the first BB and the small combination A are won simultaneously, the first BB is given priority to stop control.
(2) When the first BB and the small combination B are won in duplicate, the small combination B is given priority to stop control.
That is, there may be provided a small combination for which stop control is given priority over the BB combination and a small combination for which stop control is given priority to the BB combination.
(3) When the first BB and the small role A are both won, when the small role A wins, or a part of the symbol combinations corresponding to the small role A (for example, at the first stop, When 2 stops), a notification corresponding to the small combination A (notification that the small combination A can win) is performed.
In other words, the result of the first stop or the second stop (the stop mode after the execution of the first stop or the second stop) is used to notify the first BB combination that is controlled to stop in preference to the small combination A. Thus, when the first BB combination cannot be won regardless of the position where the third stop is stopped (the small combination A can be won), a notification corresponding to the small combination A is performed. Further, when the small combination A wins as a result of the game, a notification corresponding to the small combination A is performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform notification that is most advantageous to the player in accordance with various game situations that change in the middle of the game, as well as the content notified by the effect display device S40 and the like. It is possible to prevent the winning combination from being inconsistent.
(4) When the first BB and the small combination B are won in duplicate, a notification corresponding to the small combination B is performed during rotation of all reels.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that it may have a display (7 segment etc.) which displays the number of the symbol (or symbol combination) by which it stopped and is controlled by the main control board M. In such a configuration, the effect display device S40 performs a contradiction effect that does not correspond to the symbol (or symbol combination) that is stopped and displayed. For example, when the replay-replay-replay symbol combination is stopped on the active line, an effect that is highly likely to be output when the watermelon is won (for example, the lamp is lit in green) is executed.

In this example, an earphone jack that can output (cannot input) from the sub-control board S side may be provided, and a configuration having the following characteristics may be used.
(1) The volume output from the earphone jack can be selected from a plurality of levels by using the sub input button of the gaming machine.
(2) Even when a game is played using an earphone jack, when an error occurs, an error notification sound is output from the gaming machine at a predetermined volume (for example, output from a speaker provided in the gaming machine) ).
(3) When a game is played using the earphone jack, even when the maximum volume is selected, an error notification sound is output from the earphone jack at a predetermined volume that is not the maximum volume.

  Further, during the AT state or during BB execution, even when a game is played using an earphone jack, it may be configured such that a production sound is output from the gaming machine. Further, a volume for when the earphone jack is not used and a volume for when the earphone jack is not used may be stored separately. Even when the earphone is removed, the sound volume for when the earphone jack is used may not be cleared immediately (to the initial value). For example, when no operation is performed for 10 minutes, any volume may be cleared (to an initial value). However, when the earphone is still inserted, the sound volume for using the earphone jack does not have to be cleared (to the initial value). The earphone jack is preferably provided in a place where it does not interfere with the game (for example, when the earphone is inserted into the earphone jack, the earphone cord does not get entangled with the player's arm when trying to operate the start lever) ).

In this example,
(1) The winning probability of the re-gamer can be varied between the end of the BB when the BB is acquired at a specific number or more and the end of the BB when the BB is acquired at a specific number or less. It may be configured.
(2) You may have two or more RT states which transfer when RT state (for example, RT1) with the relatively high winning probability of a re-game player is complete | finished. For example, it may be configured to shift to “RT0” after “RT1” ends, or may be configured to shift to “RT3” (a newly provided RT state).
(3) The RT state is shifted when a predetermined winning combination is won. That is, the transition of the RT state does not correspond to the winning one-on-one, and the transition is made with a constant probability regardless of the condition device or the winning (for example, the RT transition lottery is executed with a certain probability for each game).
(4) It is possible to mount 0th RT transition, duplicate winning combination of 0 sheets, and double winning combination of 0 sheets. That is, no matter which push order is stopped, no matter what position the stop operation is performed, no more than one winning combination is provided as a 0 winning combination, and the RT state shifts by winning the 0 winning combination. It may be configured to be able to obtain a double winning combination of 0 and 7 and a winning combination of 0 and A. It should be noted that, when the double winning combination of the 0 sheets is selected, it may be configured such that either the 0 sheet combination that shifts to RT or the 0 sheet combination that does not shift to RT is awarded according to the pressing order. It is also possible to make a winning combination by prioritizing the 0-sheet combination by winning the 0-sheet combination and the BB combination.

  In addition, as in this example, the push order of the push order bell is 6 choices ("Left → Middle → Right", "Left → Right → Middle", "Middle → Left → Right", "Middle → Right → Left", “Right → Left → Middle” and “Right → Middle → Left” (6 choices), and push order replay push order is 3 choices (1st stop is left, middle, right 3 choices) In this case, the push order display in the push order display device D270 is different from the push order navigation display related to the push order bell and the push order navigation display related to the push order replay. You may comprise so that a display and 3 choice push order navigation display may differ. As an example, the push order display relating to 6 choices is “= 1” in the case of “left → middle → right”, “= 2” in the case of “left → right → middle”, “middle → left → “= 3” for “right”, “= 4” for “middle → right → left”, “= 5” for “right → left → middle”, “right → middle → left” Is displayed as “= 6”, and the push order display for the three options is “= 7” when the first stop is on the left, and “= 8” when the first stop is in the middle. When the first stop is on the right, the display may be such as “= 9”.

In this example, the following configuration may be used.
(1) It is configured so that the number of AT digested games, which is the number of games continuously digested in the “AT in progress state”, “specialized sign state”, or “additional special state”, can be displayed on the effect display device. If the number of remaining games is 0 and the AT state is changed from the “AT state” to the “normal game state”, the AT lottery is won again within the specific game and the “AT state” is changed. While the number of digested games is taken over and added, the “advantageous section” continues for a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games), and then transitions from the “AT state” to the “normal game state” and then again within a specific game. When the AT lottery is won and the state is shifted to the “AT state”, the previous AT digest game number is not taken over, and the number of AT digest games is newly counted from 0 games.
(2) If the stop button is not operated for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the reel starts to rotate, an indication prompting the reel to stop on the effect display device S40 (for example, “reel If you do not operate the stop button for a certain period of time after the reel starts rotating in a game where push order navigation has occurred, (2-1) Production The display areas of the push order navigation display on the display device S40 and the display prompting to stop the reel do not overlap, and (2-2) the display prompting to stop the reel is not displayed.
(3) When the power is turned “on → off → on” in a game where push order navigation occurs, the reel rotation speed becomes constant and before the stop button operation becomes valid. The push order navigation (display on the push order display device D270 and / or display on the effect display device S40) is redisplayed at the timing.
(4) A state related to a certain AT and a state related to another AT are states related to an AT in which the push order navigation is generated in a game in which the common bell is won or the push order navigation may occur. The frequency with which the push order navigation occurs in the game in which the common bell is won differs between the state with respect to a certain AT and the state with respect to another AT that is a state with respect to the AT where push order navigation can occur.
(5) In the RT state (“RT1” in this example) where the winning probability of replay is the highest, the proportion of games in which push order navigation occurs is higher than the proportion of games in which push order navigation does not occur high. For example, the combined winning rate of the bell role and the replaying role is ½ or more. With this configuration, the game can proceed without the player getting tired during the AT.
You may comprise as mentioned above.

  Here, the feature point about the above-mentioned game section is explained in full detail below.

≪Normal section≫
(1) Push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) Push order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) A command (signal) related to a condition device that causes a difference in the profit rate of the player depending on the pressing order is not transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) The lottery for shifting to the “advantageous section” can be executed except during the internal winning of BB and the execution of BB.

≪Standby section≫
(1) Push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) Push order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) A command (signal) related to a condition device that causes a difference in the profit rate of the player depending on the pressing order is not transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) The lottery for the “advantageous section” is not executed.
(5) After the BB wins in the “standby state”, it becomes an “advantageous section” from the next game.

≪Advantageous section≫
(1) Push order navigation can be displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) Push order navigation can be displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) A command (signal) related to a condition device that causes a difference in the profit rate of the player depending on the pressing order can be transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) A lottery for changing the performance of the “advantageous section” (for example, shifting from a “high probability state” to an “AT in-progress state” as an AT-related state), an AT game number addition lottery, or the like may be executed.
(5) During the “favorable section”, the advantageous section indicator YH is always lit.
(6) If the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0, the “advantageous section” is basically used unless the BB or push order navigation is executed at least once in the “advantageous section”. However, as an exception, when the “advantageous section” continues for a predetermined number of games (1500 in this example), the BB and the push order navigation are performed once in the “advantageous section”. The “advantageous section” can be completed even if it is not executed.
(7) The advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is measured in all the games in the "favorable section" (for example, every game counter value is added even during execution of BB).

Here, the feature points related to the lottery for the “advantageous section” will be described in detail below.
(1) The presence / absence of the setting for the “advantageous section” is determined based on the result of the role lottery, and the presence / absence of the setting for the “advantageous section” is not determined in the course of the number of games.
(2) When a condition device having a different lottery probability depending on the set value is established, the set lottery for the “advantageous section” is not executed when the condition device is established.
(3) In the case where a certain condition device is established and the set lottery for the “advantageous section” is executed, even if the set values are different, the lottery probabilities are the same.
(4) The performance of the “advantageous section” does not differ depending on the set value (for example, when a strong cherry is established, the setting 1 shifts to the “high probability state”, and the setting 6 shifts to the “AT state”. Etc., there is no difference depending on the setting value).
(5) Setting to “advantageous section” When winning the lottery, the next game will be changed to “advantageous section” (setting to “advantageous section” in the BB role established in “normal section”. If a lottery is won, it can be set as a “standby section” in the next game).

Here, the characteristic points related to the performance change of the “advantageous section” will be described in detail below.
(1) The lottery for changing the performance of the “advantageous section” with reference to the set value is not executed (the condition common to all the set values may be that a predetermined number of games have elapsed and a predetermined condition device is established) .
(2) When a condition device having different lottery probabilities is established depending on the set value, the lottery for changing the performance of the “advantageous section” is not executed when the condition device is established. A lottery or the like is not executed in addition to the number of AT games.
(3) When the BB is won internally, the lottery for changing the performance of the “advantageous section” is not executed. A lottery or the like is not executed in addition to the number of AT games.
(4) During the execution of the BB, when the lottery probability of the BB combination that triggered the BB being executed differs depending on the set value, the lottery for changing the performance of the “advantageous section” during the execution of the BB Is not executed. A lottery or the like is not executed in addition to the number of AT games.
(5) A lottery that changes the performance of the “advantageous section” during the execution of the BB when the lottery probability of the BB combination that has triggered the BB being executed does not differ depending on the set value during the execution of the BB. Can be executed. A lottery or the like can be executed by adding the number of AT games.

  Moreover, you may apply the following structures to the rotary type game machine which concerns on this example. Moreover, the following structures may be applied independently and a some structure may be combined.

<< Point 1 >>
(1-1) After lottery of various roles by the main control means (main control board), AT lottery is performed based on one information (combination of condition devices) determined by the lottery result. In the case of), the AT lottery is not always performed.
(1-2) The AT lottery includes an AT lottery state promotion (low probability → high probability) lottery. In this case, the above (1-1) is applied, but the AT lottery state demotion ( When the lottery is performed (high probability → low probability), the above (1-1) is not applied (the lottery is possible even with complete loss).
(A) When the duration of the AT lottery state (high probability) is determined by the number of games, (1-1) is not applied to the game number lottery.
Example 1: The number of games varies randomly even with the same combination of condition devices.
Example 2: After winning the promotion lottery in the AT lottery state, the number of games lottery is separately performed based on the role lottery result (including loss) in the next game and thereafter.
(B) A combination of a method of determining the duration of the AT lottery state (high probability) by the number of games and a method of performing a demotion lottery in the AT lottery state (transition to a demoted lottery after a so-called guarantee period).
(1-3) The AT lottery includes an AT state promotion lottery (non-AT → AT). In this case, the above (1-1) is applied, but the AT state demotion (AT → non-) (AT) When the lottery is performed, the above (1-1) is not applied (the lottery is possible even with complete loss).
(1-4) In the AT lottery, there is a lottery (low probability → high probability) lottery of transition to the specialized AT, and in this case, (1-1) above is applied. (1-1) is not applicable when performing a lottery (high probability → low probability) lottery in the transition lottery state to the specialized AT (the lottery is possible even with complete loss).
(1-5) The AT lottery includes a promotion lottery (AT → specialized AT) to a specialized AT. In this case, (1-1) is applied, but the AT status is demoted (special (1-1), the above-mentioned (1-1) is not applied (the lottery is possible even with complete loss).
In addition, when an AT lottery (any one of (1-2) to (1-5)) is won and a grace period (so-called latent / predictor game) is provided until the state transition, 1-1) does not apply.

<< Point 2 >>
(2-1) After lottery of various roles by the main control means, AT lottery is performed based on one piece of information (combination of condition devices) determined by the lottery result. is there.
(2-2) Information on the AT can be transmitted from the main control means to the sub-control means at the lottery opportunity (when the start lever is ON) in (2-1).
(2-3) The information that can be transmitted in (2-2) includes at least the AT state type in the game and the AT state type in the next game.
(2-4) Based on the information of (2-3) transmitted in (2-2), the sub-control means determines and executes a series of effect contents corresponding to the game including the AT state transition notification. To do.
(2-5) The main control means does not output information on the AT at the lottery opportunity in (2-1) as the outer end signal / test signal.
After the game ends, only the AT state type determined by the main control means is output.

<< Point 3 >>
(3-1) When the main control means is in the AT state (AT, specialized AT), when it wins a small role in which the number of payouts and / or the RT state changes depending on the pushing order, the main control means The information that can identify the pushing order that is most advantageous to the player is displayed. However, if the small role is not won (reversal, unrestricted small role, 7-side reverse replay that does not change the RT state, Etc.) do not display anything.
(3-2) When the sub-control means is in the AT state (AT, specialized AT), the number of remaining games in the AT state (hereinafter, the number of remaining AT games) and the total number of games consumed in the AT state ( Hereinafter, it is possible to display the total number of AT games (the total net increase number may be displayed).
(3-3) The number of AT remaining games is updated on the basis of the number of remaining games in the AT state transmitted from the main control unit for each game. The AT total game number is updated for each game. Is updated based on the AT status type transmitted from.
Considering the story of the advantageous section, the total number of AT games (including the total net increase number) is cleared when AT → non-AT.
(3-4) The number of remaining AT games can be hidden (or not updated) when in the AT state, but the total number of AT games is not hidden (or not updated) when in the AT state. .
A battle effect state before the end of the AT state, a specialized AT state, etc. are assumed.
(3-5) The AT remaining game number does not display the number of remaining AT games in the AT state transmitted from the main control means, but can display less than that.

<< Point 4 >>
(4-1) There is a case of displaying in a specific display mode on a specific display controlled by the main control means (for example, “= 1” is used to perform 6-pick bell forward push monitor display).
(4-2) When displaying in a specific display mode (example: “= 1”), an operation instruction image (example: 1, 2, 3) is displayed on the image display.
(4-3) When an operation in accordance with the instruction is performed, the image display unit displays a series of effect images A (for example: 1, 2, 3 sequentially corresponding to the operation, and an effect image ( Example: An image that defeats an enemy)) is displayed.
(4-4) If the operation according to the instruction is not performed and it is determined that the operation according to the instruction is not performed, the effect image B (eg, all the operation instruction images are erased from the effect image A, and the incorrect push order is determined. The effect image shown (example: image attacked by the enemy)).
(4-5) In the case of (4-3), when a small combination (e.g., 9 small combination for 6-choice bell correct answer) wins, a winning notification image (e.g., GET) is displayed on the image display. However, in the case of (4-4), even if a small combination (for example, one small combination at the time of 6-option bell incorrect answer) wins, a winning notification image (for example, GET) is not displayed on the image display.
(4-6) Even in the case of (4-4), when the game ends, information on the AT (eg, the number of added games) can be displayed.
(4-7) When a specific error (door error, etc.) occurs when a specific display mode (example: “= 1”) and operation instruction image (example: 1, 2, 3) are displayed The specific display mode maintains the display, but the operation instruction image is not displayed.
It is assumed that the main control means displays an error on a separate display.
(4-8) An effect that prompts the user to operate the sub button when nothing is displayed on the specific display device (when the sub button operation is performed) than when displaying in a specific display mode (eg, “= 1”). It is easy to generate a necessary extra effect).

<< Point 5 >>
(5-1) There is a case of displaying in a specific display mode on a specific display controlled by the main control means (for example, “= 1” is used to perform 6-pick bell forward push monitor display).
(5-2) When displaying in a specific display mode (for example, “= 1”), the first effect image (for example, the push order of 1, 2, 3 + the image during AT) is displayed on the image display. And a case where a second effect image (e.g., a pressing order of 1, 2, 3 + an image during specialized AT and an additional confirmation effect occurs) is displayed.
(5-3) The expectation that the stay period in the AT state is extended is higher when the second effect image is displayed than when the first effect image is displayed.
(5-4) In the game before the game that displays the second effect image, it is possible to execute the sign effect that suggests the display of the second effect image.
(5-5) The second effect image (and the sign effect) is not displayed when the number of AT remaining games is less than a predetermined value (eg, in the battle effect state, when LAST? Game is displayed).

<< Point 6 >>
(6-1) There is a case where the display is performed in a specific display mode (for example, “= 1”) on a specific display controlled by the main control unit.
(6-2) When displaying in a specific display mode (e.g., "= 1"), displaying on the image display device in the first display mode (e.g., 1, 2, 3), and the second display mode (Example: → (arrow symbol)).
(6-3) The first display mode (example: 1, 2, 3) is a display mode in which the pressing order composed of numbers can be specified, and the second display mode (example: → (arrow symbol)) is It is a display mode in which the pressing order composed of other than numerals can be specified.
(6-4) The degree of expectation that the stay period in the AT state is extended is different between when the first display mode is displayed and when the second display mode is displayed.
Even when the second display mode is displayed, if the operation according to the pressing order is not performed, the basic operation of point 4 is followed.

<< Point 7 >>
(7-1) The first lottery result (for example, the correct push order is left → middle → right push order bell) and the second lottery result with the same payout number regardless of the push order (example) : Common bell).
(7-2) When the first lottery result is determined and when the second lottery result is determined, the profit related to the instruction function is different (for example, AT addition: first lottery result> second Lottery results).
(7-3) When the first lottery result is determined during the notification game, a specific display mode (eg, “= 1”) is displayed on a specific display controlled by the main control means, and an image is displayed. The display is also performed on the device in a display mode in which the pressing order can be specified.
(7-4) When the second lottery result is determined during the notification game, the push order is displayed on the image display.
(7-5) When the second lottery result is determined during the notification game, the degree of expectation that the stay period of the notification game is extended differs depending on whether the push order is displayed on the image display or not. * When the second lottery result is determined during the notification game, when the push order is displayed on the image display, or when the operation according to the push order is not performed, the basic operation of point 4 is followed.

<< Point 8 >>
(8-1) The first lottery result is a lottery result in which the number of payouts varies depending on the pressing order.
(8-2) When the first lottery result is determined inside the bonus, the reels are controlled to stop so that the number of payouts becomes the same regardless of the pressing order.
(8-3) When the first lottery result is determined during the information game and inside the bonus, a specific display mode (eg, “= 1”) is displayed on a specific display controlled by the main control means. ) Is displayed, and the image display is also displayed in a display mode in which the pressing order can be specified.
(8-4) When the first lottery result is determined during the information game and inside the non-bonus, and when the first lottery result is determined during the information game and inside the bonus Thus, the same specific display mode (for example, “= 1”) is displayed on the specific display, but different display modes can be displayed on the image display (for example, in the former case, 1 · 2.3. In the latter case, → (arrow symbol)).
In the latter case, if the operation according to the pressing order is not performed, the basic operation of point 4 is followed.
(8-5) In the case of (8-3), if an effect to win a bonus is displayed in the previous game, the display is erased.
(8-6) Information related to AT (eg, number of added games) cannot be displayed during a notification game and inside a bonus.
If the additional amount is confirmed, but the additional amount has not been notified, the notification is postponed until after the inside of the bonus is removed (during bonus game, after the bonus is over).

<< Point 9 >>
(9-1) The first lottery result (for example, the push order replay in which the first stop is left and the high RT is maintained), and the second lottery result (the advantage degree does not change depending on the pushing order) E.g. Special Replay).
(9-2) When the second lottery result is determined, a game in which a specific symbol combination can be stopped and displayed and the push order is notified (eg: AT addition is determined (done) or specialized zone) And a game in which a specific symbol combination is not notified of the pressing order that can be stopped and displayed.
(9-3) An image controlled by the sub-control means without notifying the specific display controlled by the main control means when notifying the push order in which the specific symbol combination can be stopped and displayed. The display unit notifies the pressing order.
(9-4) When the second lottery result is determined and the notification of the pressing order in which the specific symbol combination can be stopped and displayed (hereinafter referred to as reverse pressing 7 notification) is performed, the specific symbol combination (eg, 7 replays) is prepared. Even if it is not (even if there is a miss in the line), information on the AT (eg, the number of additional games) can be displayed at the end of the game.
(9-5) When the second lottery result is determined and no reverse press 7 notification is made, even if a specific symbol combination (example: 777 replay) is prepared, information on AT (example: extra game) at the end of the game Number) is not displayed.
(9-6) When the first lottery result is determined, the reverse push 7 notification is not displayed, but when the third lottery result (normal replay without push order) is determined, the reverse press 7 notification is issued. Can be displayed.
(9-7) The reverse push 7 notification can be maintained even when the operation according to the reverse press 7 notification is not performed (when the reverse press is not performed or when 7 is not stopped at the first stop). .

<< Point 10 >>
(10-1) The first lottery result (for example, the push order replay in which the first stop is left and the high RT is maintained), and the second lottery result (the advantage degree does not change depending on the pushing order). E.g. Special Replay).
(10-2) The second lottery result has a higher probability of winning in the second RT (high RT that is more likely to stay during the notification game) than in the first RT.
(10-3) When the second lottery result is determined, a game in which a specific symbol combination is informed of the pressing order that can be stopped and displayed (for example, when an AT addition is determined (done), or a specialized zone And a game in which a specific symbol combination is not notified of the pressing order that can be stopped and displayed.
(10-4) When the second lottery result is determined after the notification game is finished and before the first RT falls to the first RT, the specific symbol combination cannot be stopped and displayed. Is notified.
After the notification game is finished and before the fall from the second RT to the first RT, it is determined that the AT lottery will not be performed (10-5) In the case of (10-4), a specific symbol combination ( (Example: 777 replays) Even if the game ends, information about AT (eg, number of added games) is not displayed.
(10-6) When the first lottery result is determined, the same effect as the case of (10-4) is not displayed, but when the third lottery result (normal replay without pushing order) is determined. The effect similar to the case of (10-4) can be displayed.

<< Point 11 >>
(11-1) The correct pressing order of the pressing order small combination (or replay) is 6 choices, and the operation order from the first stop to the third stop is notified to the image display during the notification game.
(11-2) The correct pressing order of the pressing order replay (or small role) is three choices, but the operation order from the first stop to the third stop is notified to the image display during the notification game.
(11-3) In the case of (11-1) and the case of (11-2), the display mode when the operation order is notified on the image display device is the same (color, shape, etc. Is not informed).
In the case of (11-2), since there are two choices of correct answer in 3 choices and incorrect answer or incorrect answer in 3 choices as a case where the operation in accordance with the push order is not performed, each has a different effect Let it be an action.

(Summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configuration shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concepts based on the further configurations shown in the above embodiments are added to these concepts as well as the combination and separation (higher level conceptualization) of these listed concepts. May be.

The spinning machine according to the aspect (1)
A plurality of reels (eg, reel M50);
A plurality of stop switches (eg, stop button D40);
A main information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, push order display device D270);
A sub information display unit (for example, an effect display device S40) capable of displaying information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub game part (for example, sub control board S) connected to the main game part,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Role lottery means for performing role lottery,
Main information display control means for controlling the display of the main information display unit (for example, push order display device D270),
By satisfying the predetermined condition, it can be controlled to the notification state,
Information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination in a game in which the predetermined combination is won by at least the combination lottery means in the situation controlled to the notification state. It is configured to be able to display on an information display unit (for example, push order display device D270),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Sub information display control means for controlling the display of the sub information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40),
An operation mode in which, in a game in which the predetermined role is won, information that can specify an operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined role is displayed on the sub information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40). Notification control can be executed,
When performing the operation mode notification control, information that can specify an operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined role in the first display mode is displayed; And displaying information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined role in a second display mode that is different from the display mode. ,
When the operation mode notification control is executed when a specific condition is satisfied, a stop switch (for example, a stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined role in the second display mode rather than the first display mode. This is a swivel-type gaming machine that is configured so that information capable of specifying the operation mode is easily displayed.

The rotary type gaming machine according to this aspect (2)
A plurality of reels (eg, reel M50);
A plurality of stop switches (eg, stop button D40);
A main information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, push order display device D270);
A sub information display unit (for example, an effect display device S40) capable of displaying information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub game part (for example, sub control board S) connected to the main game part,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Role lottery means for performing role lottery,
Main information display control means for controlling the display of the main information display unit (for example, push order display device D270),
By satisfying the predetermined condition, it can be controlled to the notification state,
Information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination in a game in which the predetermined combination is won by at least the combination lottery means in the situation controlled to the notification state. It is configured to be able to display on an information display unit (for example, push order display device D270),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Sub information display control means for controlling the display of the sub information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40),
An operation mode in which, in a game in which the predetermined role is won, information that can specify an operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined role is displayed on the sub information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40). Notification control can be executed,
When performing the operation mode notification control, information that can specify an operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined role in the first display mode is displayed; And displaying information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined role in a second display mode that is different from the display mode. ,
Rather than displaying information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined role in the first display mode, the second display mode plays the predetermined role. In the case of displaying information that can specify the operation mode of the corresponding stop switch (for example, the stop button D40), it is configured such that the degree of expectation that a privilege is given to the player is higher.
When the operation mode notification control is executed when a specific condition is satisfied, information that can specify the operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination in the first display mode Is displayed, but the second display mode is configured not to display information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined role. It is a spinning machine that is characterized by

The rotary type gaming machine according to this aspect (3)
A plurality of reels (eg, reel M50);
A plurality of stop switches (eg, stop button D40);
A main information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, push order display device D270);
A sub information display unit (for example, an effect display device S40) capable of displaying information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub game part (for example, sub control board S) connected to the main game part,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Role lottery means for performing role lottery,
Main information display control means for controlling the display of the main information display unit (for example, push order display device D270),
By satisfying the predetermined condition, it can be controlled to the notification state,
Information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination in a game in which the predetermined combination is won by at least the combination lottery means in the situation controlled to the notification state. It is configured to be able to display on an information display unit (for example, push order display device D270),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Sub information display control means for controlling the display of the sub information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40),
An operation mode in which, in a game in which the predetermined role is won, information that can specify an operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined role is displayed on the sub information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40). Notification control can be executed,
When performing the operation mode notification control, information that can specify an operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined role in the first display mode is displayed; And displaying information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined role in a second display mode that is different from the display mode. ,
The first display mode is a display mode for individually specifying the operation mode of each stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) in the plurality of stop switches (for example, the stop button D40),
The second display mode is a display mode in which operation modes of each stop switch (for example, stop button D40) in the plurality of stop switches (for example, stop button D40) are integrated and specified. It is a torso game machine.

The spinning machine according to the aspect (4) is
A plurality of reels (eg, reel M50);
A plurality of stop switches (eg, stop button D40);
A main information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, push order display device D270);
A sub information display unit (for example, an effect display device S40) capable of displaying information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub game part (for example, sub control board S) connected to the main game part (for example, main control board M),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Role lottery means for performing role lottery,
Main information display control means for controlling the display of the main information display unit (for example, push order display device D270),
By satisfying the predetermined condition, it can be controlled to the notification state,
Information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination in a game in which the predetermined combination is won by at least the combination lottery means in the situation controlled to the notification state. It is configured to be able to display on an information display unit (for example, push order display device D270),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Sub information display control means for controlling the display of the sub information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40),
An operation mode in which, in a game in which the predetermined role is won, information that can specify an operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined role is displayed on the sub information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40). Notification control can be executed,
When performing the operation mode notification control, information that can specify an operation mode of a stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined role in the first display mode is displayed; And displaying information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined role in a second display mode that is different from the display mode. ,
When displaying information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination in the first display mode, the displayed stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) When the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) is operated in an operation mode different from the operation mode, the spinning machine is configured to hide the displayed information. .

The spinning machine according to the aspect (5) is
A plurality of reels (eg, reel M50);
A plurality of stop switches (eg, stop button D40);
An information output unit capable of outputting information (for example, an effect display device S40),
In a game where a predetermined role is won by a role lottery means for performing a role lottery, a symbol combination to which a first profit is given when a stop switch (for example, stop button D40) is operated in the first operation mode Can be displayed,
In the game in which the predetermined role is won, when a stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) is operated in the second operation mode, the symbol combination to which the second profit is given can be displayed. And
In the game where the predetermined combination is won, the information output unit (for example, the effect display device S40) can output the notification information in response to the display of the symbol combination to which the first profit is given. so,
In the game where the predetermined combination is won, even if the symbol combination to which the second profit is given is displayed, the information output unit (for example, the effect display device S40) is configured not to output the notification information. It is a swing type game machine characterized by the above.

The rotary type gaming machine according to the aspect (6)
A plurality of reels (eg, reel M50);
A plurality of stop switches (eg, stop button D40);
A main information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, push order display device D270);
A sub information display unit (for example, an effect display device S40) capable of displaying information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub game part (for example, sub control board S) connected to the main game part (for example, main control board M),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Role lottery means for performing role lottery,
Main information display control means for controlling the display of the main information display unit (for example, push order display device D270),
In the game where the first predetermined combination is won by the combination lottery means, the profits given in the game may differ depending on the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40),
In a game in which a second predetermined combination different from the first predetermined combination is won by the combination lottery means, regardless of the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40), the profits given in the game are the same,
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Sub information display control means for controlling the display of the sub information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40),
In the game in which the first predetermined combination is won, information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the first predetermined combination is displayed in the main information display unit (for example, the push order display device D270). ) And information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the first predetermined combination can be displayed on the sub information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40),
In the game in which the second predetermined combination is won, information on the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) is not displayed on the main information display unit (for example, the push order display device D270), while the stop switch (for example, , A rotating type gaming machine configured to be able to display information on an operation mode of the stop button D40) on a sub information display unit (for example, an effect display device S40).

The spinning machine according to the aspect (7) is
A plurality of reels (eg, reel M50);
A plurality of stop switches (eg, stop button D40);
A main information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, push order display device D270);
A sub information display unit (for example, an effect display device S40) capable of displaying information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub game part (for example, sub control board S) connected to the main game part (for example, main control board M),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Role lottery means for performing role lottery,
Main information display control means for controlling the display of the main information display unit (for example, push order display device D270),
After the special combination is won by the combination lottery means, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is displayed, it can be controlled to the special gaming state.
In the case of a normal game section until the special combination is won by the combination lottery means, in the game in which the predetermined combination is won by the combination lottery means, the game according to the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40). While the benefits granted can vary,
In the game where the special combination is won by the combination lottery means when the special combination is won by the combination lottery means and the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is displayed, the stop switch (for example, Regardless of the operation mode of the stop button D40), the benefits given in the game are the same,
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Sub information display control means for controlling the display of the sub information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40),
Whether it is the normal game section or the internal winning section, in a game where the predetermined combination is won, a stop switch (for example, a stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined combination Information that can specify the operation mode can be displayed on the main information display unit (for example, the push order display device D270), and the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined role can be specified. Can be displayed on the sub-information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40).

The spinning machine according to the aspect (8) is
A plurality of reels (eg, reel M50);
A plurality of stop switches (eg, stop button D40);
A main information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, push order display device D270);
A sub information display unit (for example, an effect display device S40) capable of displaying information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub game part (for example, sub control board S) connected to the main game part (for example, main control board M),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Role lottery means for performing role lottery,
Main information display control means for controlling the display of the main information display unit (for example, push order display device D270),
In a game in which a predetermined combination is won by the combination lottery means, the symbol combination displayed according to the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) may be different, while the symbol combination according to the mode of the displayed symbol combination The game state after the game is configured not to change,
In the game where the predetermined combination is won by the combination lottery means, when a stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) is operated in a predetermined operation mode, a specific symbol combination can be displayed.
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Sub information display control means for controlling the display of the sub information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40),
In a game in which the predetermined combination is won, information that can specify the predetermined operation mode is displayed without displaying information that can specify the predetermined operation mode on the main information display unit (for example, the push order display device D270). When the information is displayed on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40) and the information that can specify the predetermined operation mode is also displayed on the main information display unit (for example, the push order display device D270). A spinning-type game machine characterized in that it is configured so as not to be displayed on the effect display device S40).

The spinning machine according to this aspect (9)
A plurality of reels (eg, reel M50);
A plurality of stop switches (eg, stop button D40);
A main information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, push order display device D270);
A sub information display unit (for example, an effect display device S40) capable of displaying information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub game part (for example, sub control board S) connected to the main game part (for example, main control board M),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Role lottery means for performing role lottery,
Main information display control means for controlling the display of the main information display unit (for example, push order display device D270),
By satisfying the predetermined condition, it can be controlled to the notification state,
Under the situation where the notification state is controlled, it is possible to specify the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the first predetermined combination in a game in which the first predetermined combination is won at least by the combination lottery means. Is configured to display main information on a main information display unit (for example, push order display device D270),
In a game in which the second predetermined combination is won by the combination lottery means, the displayed symbol combination may differ depending on the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40), while depending on the displayed symbol combination mode. Is configured so that the gaming state after the game does not change,
In a game in which the second predetermined combination is won by the combination lottery means, when a stop switch (for example, stop button D40) is operated in a predetermined operation mode, a predetermined symbol combination can be displayed.
In a game in which the second predetermined combination is won by the combination lottery means, when a stop switch (for example, stop button D40) is operated in a specific operation mode different from the predetermined operation mode, the predetermined symbol The combination is configured so that it cannot be displayed.
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Sub information display control means for controlling the display of the sub information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40),
In the game where the second predetermined combination is won, the predetermined operation mode is displayed without displaying information on the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) on the main information display unit (for example, the push order display device D270). When the identifiable information is displayed on the sub information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40) and the information regarding the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40), the main information display unit (for example, the push order display device D270) is displayed. And a case where information that can specify the specific operation mode is displayed on the sub information display unit (for example, the effect display device S40) without being displayed on It is a gaming machine.

The spinning machine according to this aspect (10)
A plurality of reels (eg, reel M50);
A plurality of stop switches (eg, stop button D40);
An information output unit capable of outputting information (for example, an effect display device S40),
In a game in which a predetermined combination is won by a combination lottery means for performing combination lottery, some stop switches (for example, the stop button D40) of the plurality of stop switches (for example, the stop button D40) are operated in a predetermined operation mode. At that point, it will be definitive that a given symbol combination is displayed,
In a game in which the predetermined combination is won by the combination lottery means for performing combination lottery, some stop switches (for example, the stop button D40) in the plurality of stop switches (for example, the stop button D40) are in the predetermined operation mode. When it is not operated, the predetermined symbol combination is configured not to be displayed so as to be definite,
In a game in which the predetermined combination is won, information that can specify the predetermined operation mode regarding some stop switches (for example, the stop button D40) in the plurality of stop switches (for example, the stop button D40) is output as an information output unit ( For example, information that can be output by the effect display device S40) and that can specify an operation mode related to the remaining stop switches (for example, the stop button D40) in the plurality of stop switches (for example, the stop button D40) is also provided in the information output unit ( For example, it is a rotating type game machine characterized in that it can be output by an effect display device S40).

The spinning machine according to this aspect (11)
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub game part (for example, sub control board S) connected to the main game part,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Role lottery means for performing role lottery,
An information transmission means for transmitting information to the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S),
The winning information is determined according to the result of the role lottery by the role lottery means,
When the determined winning information is winning information including a special role, based on the winning information, it is possible to derive the small role winning information of the small role simultaneously won with the special role,
It is configured to be able to derive production group information corresponding to the small role winning information and transmit it to the secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S),
The revolving structure characterized in that the production group information corresponding to a certain small role winning information and the production group information corresponding to another small role winning information can be derived as the same information. It is a type game machine.

The rotary type gaming machine according to this aspect (12)
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub game part (for example, sub control board S) connected to the main game part,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Role lottery means for performing role lottery,
An information transmission means for transmitting information to the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S),
The winning information is determined according to the result of the role lottery by the role lottery means,
Based on the winning information, it is possible to derive different small role / replaying role winning information depending on the type of the small role or replaying role,
It is configured to be able to derive production group information corresponding to the small combination / re-game combination winning information and transmit it to the secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S),
Having a conversion table for converting the small role / replaying role winning information into the effect group information, wherein the effect group information is stored in the conversion table;
A revolving system characterized in that the production group information can be acquired from the conversion table using a specific address as a reference address, and information corresponding to the small role / replaying role winning information as an offset value It is a gaming machine.

The spinning machine according to the aspect (13)
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub game part (for example, sub control board S) connected to the main game part (for example, main control board M),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Role lottery means for performing role lottery,
An information transmission means for transmitting information to the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S),
The winning information is determined according to the result of the role lottery by the role lottery means,
Based on the winning information, it is possible to derive different small role / replaying role winning information depending on the type of the small role or replaying role,
It is configured to be able to derive production group information corresponding to the small combination / re-game combination winning information and transmit it to the secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S),
Having a conversion table for converting the small role / replaying role winning information into the effect group information, and the conversion table stores information on the effect group information;
When deriving the production group information corresponding to a certain small role / replaying role winning information, the production group information A can be derived by calculating X times using the conversion table. When deriving the production group information corresponding to the small role / regame combination winning information different from the combination / regame combination winning information, the production group number B is calculated Y times using the conversion table. This is a swivel type gaming machine characterized in that it can be derived.

The spinning machine according to this aspect (14)
A plurality of reels (eg, reel M50);
A plurality of stop switches (eg, stop button D40);
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, a push order display device D270),
In accordance with the result of the lottery by the role lottery that performs the role lottery, the winning information and the lottery information are determined,
It is configured such that the output information corresponding to a certain winning information and the output information corresponding to another winning information can be determined as the same information,
In a situation in which the predetermined winning information is determined by at least the winning lottery means in a situation where the predetermined notification state is controlled, the operation mode of the stop switch (for example, the stop button D40) corresponding to the predetermined winning information is changed. It is configured to be able to display identifiable information on an information display unit (for example, push order display device D270),
It is a rotating type gaming machine configured to be able to execute a lottery regarding the control of the predetermined notification state based on the output information.

P Revolving machine, DU front door (door)
D Door board, D10s Input acceptance sensor D20s First input sensor, D30s Second input sensor D40 Stop button, D41 Left stop button D42 Middle stop button, D43 Right stop button D50 Start lever, D60 Checkout button D70 Display panel, D80 Door switch D90 Coin shooter, D100 Blocker D130 Upper panel, D140 Lower panel D150 Decoration lamp unit, D160 Reel window D170 Medal slot, D180 Operation status indicator D200 Credit number indicator, D210 Insertion number indicator D220 Bet button, D230 Medal tray D240 Discharge port, D250 Special game status display device D260 Keyhole, D270 Payout number display device (push order display device)
D280 AT counter value display device M main control board M20 setting key switch, M30 setting / reset button C main control chip, M50 reel M51 left reel, M52 middle reel M53 right reel, M60 AT counter M70 game interval minimum timer S sub control board S10 LED lamp S20 Speaker, S30 Revolving backlight S40 Production display device, SC Sub control chip E Power supply board, E10 Power switch H Medal payout device, H10s First payout sensor H20s Second payout sensor, H40 Hopper H50 Disc, H50a Disc rotation shaft H60 Game medal exit, H70 Discharge urging means H80 Hopper motor K Revolving board, K10 Revolving motor K20 Revolving sensor IN Relay board, SB Sub input button

Claims (1)

Multiple reels,
Multiple stop switches,
A main information display section capable of displaying information;
A sub-information display unit capable of displaying information;
Main control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Sub-control means for controlling the production,
The main control means is
Role lottery means for performing role lottery,
Main information display control means for controlling the display of the main information display unit,
Under the situation where the notification state is controlled, at least in a game where a predetermined role is won, the main information display unit can be configured to display information capable of specifying the operation mode of the stop switch.
In the game where the predetermined combination is won, when the stop switch is operated in the first operation mode, the symbol combination to which the first profit is given can be displayed,
In the game in which the predetermined role is won, when the stop switch is operated in the second operation mode, the symbol combination to which the second profit is given can be displayed.
The sub-control means
In the game in which the predetermined role is won, it is possible to execute operation mode notification control for displaying information that can be specified to operate the stop switch in the first operation mode on the sub information display unit,
In the case where the operation mode notification control is executed in the game in which the predetermined role has been won, when the stop switch is operated in the first operation mode, information that enables grasping that the correct operation has been performed is displayed. After displaying the symbol combination to which the first profit is given, while displaying predetermined winning notification information on the sub information display unit,
In the case where the operation mode notification control is executed in the game in which the predetermined role is won, the correct operation is not performed when the stop switch is operated in an operation mode different from the first operation mode. Information that can be grasped is displayed, and the predetermined winning notification information is not displayed on the sub information display unit even after the symbol combination to which the second profit is given is displayed. This is a spinning machine.